WO2016080408A1 - Wireless communication terminal, wireless communication method, and wireless communication system - Google Patents
Wireless communication terminal, wireless communication method, and wireless communication system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2016080408A1 WO2016080408A1 PCT/JP2015/082307 JP2015082307W WO2016080408A1 WO 2016080408 A1 WO2016080408 A1 WO 2016080408A1 JP 2015082307 W JP2015082307 W JP 2015082307W WO 2016080408 A1 WO2016080408 A1 WO 2016080408A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- frame
- wireless communication
- transmission
- terminal
- communication terminal
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 235
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 70
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 307
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 55
- 101100172132 Mus musculus Eif3a gene Proteins 0.000 claims description 12
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 76
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 31
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 27
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000007115 recruitment Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 4
- 101100161473 Arabidopsis thaliana ABCB25 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 101100096893 Mus musculus Sult2a1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 101150081243 STA1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000006837 decompression Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000010355 oscillation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010187 selection method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 101100395869 Escherichia coli sta3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000752249 Homo sapiens Rho guanine nucleotide exchange factor 3 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100021689 Rho guanine nucleotide exchange factor 3 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920005994 diacetyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007616 round robin method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008054 signal transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910000679 solder Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009827 uniform distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W74/00—Wireless channel access
- H04W74/04—Scheduled access
- H04W74/06—Scheduled access using polling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
- H04W16/24—Cell structures
- H04W16/28—Cell structures using beam steering
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
- H04W84/10—Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
- H04W84/12—WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]
Definitions
- Embodiments described herein relate generally to a wireless communication terminal, a wireless communication method, and a wireless communication system.
- a protocol for supporting a method in which a plurality of wireless terminals perform simultaneous transmission on the uplink is being studied.
- uplink multi-user MIMO Uplink Multi-User MIMO: UL-MU-MIMO
- Uplink Multi-User Multi-Multi uplink multi-user multi-channel
- UL-MU uplink multi-user
- triggers for invoking UL-MU transmission a central control type where an access point generates a trigger and a distributed control type where a wireless terminal generates a trigger have been proposed.
- an access point provides a solicitation period before the start of UL-MU transmission, and a wireless terminal desiring to execute UL-MU transmission can send information necessary for UL-MU transmission to the access point during this solicitation period. To be notified.
- overhead before the start of UL-MU transmission increases, and there is a possibility that a notification of hope for UL-MU transmission from the wireless terminal does not come within the recruitment period. In this case, system efficiency is reduced.
- it is unknown whether there is a wireless terminal that desires to execute UL-MU transmission it is difficult to determine the timing for executing UL-MU transmission.
- a wireless terminal included in the group is broadcast by broadcasting a frame including a group ID of the group to which the wireless terminal belongs as a trigger frame.
- UL-MU transmission is performed.
- the access point does not collect requests from wireless terminals other than the wireless terminal that initially made the uplink transmission request, In response to the request from the wireless terminal that made the uplink transmission request, other wireless terminals need to perform uplink transmission. In this case, the data transmission may not be efficient for other wireless terminals.
- neither the central control type nor the distributed control type can efficiently perform uplink multiuser transmission scheduling with a small overhead.
- An embodiment of the present invention aims to efficiently schedule uplink multiuser transmission.
- a wireless communication terminal as an embodiment of the present invention includes at least one antenna, a wireless communication unit that transmits and receives a frame via the antenna, and a control unit.
- the control unit receives a first frame requesting permission for transmission via the wireless communication unit, and transmits the first frame via the wireless communication unit in response to reception of the first frame.
- a second frame for inquiring whether there is a request for z-delayed transmission to a second terminal different from the first terminal, and receiving a third frame for notifying whether there is a request for transmission via the wireless communication unit, Based on the first frame and the third frame, a fourth frame designating the third terminal permitted to transmit is transmitted via the wireless communication unit, and after the transmission of the fourth frame is completed, the wireless The fifth frame is received via the communication unit.
- FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the wireless terminal according to the first embodiment.
- wireless apparatus which concerns on 8th Embodiment.
- IEEE Std 802.11TM-2012 and IEEE Std 802.11acTM-2013 which are known as wireless LAN standards, are all incorporated herein by reference (incorporated by reference).
- FIG. 1 shows a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment.
- the wireless communication system in FIG. 1 is a wireless network including an access point (AP) 11 and a plurality of wireless terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4.
- the access point 11 is also a form of a wireless terminal, but differs from the wireless terminals 1 to 4 in having a relay function.
- the access point 11 and each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 communicate according to an arbitrary wireless standard.
- it shall conform to the IEEE 802.11 standard.
- CSMA / CA Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Avidance
- the wireless terminal 1 In order for the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to belong to the network (BSS: Basic Service Set) formed by the access point 11, the wireless terminal 1 establishes a wireless link by performing an association process with the access point 11 and an authentication process as necessary. There is a need.
- the wireless terminals 1 to 4 establish a wireless link with the access point 11 to exchange parameters necessary for communication and grasp each other's capabilities.
- the access point 11 includes a plurality of antennas.
- the access point 11 includes four antennas 12A, 12B, 12C, and 12D.
- the access point 11 is equipped with a device (wireless communication device) for wireless communication with the wireless terminals 1 to 4.
- the device includes a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated circuit that transmits and receives signals to and from wireless terminals 1 to 4, and a plurality of wireless terminals by transmitting and receiving frames to and from wireless terminals 1 to 4 via the wireless communication unit.
- a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit for controlling communication with 1 to 4.
- Each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 includes one or a plurality of antennas, and in the example of FIG. 1, each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 includes one antenna 1A, 2A, 3A, and 4A.
- Each wireless terminal is equipped with a device (wireless communication device) for wireless communication with the access point 11.
- the device controls communication with the access point 11 by transmitting / receiving a frame to / from the access point 11 via a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated circuit that transmits / receives a signal to / from the access point 11.
- a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit A control unit or a baseband integrated circuit.
- the access point 11 forms a wireless network (referred to as a first network), and a wireless terminal that communicates with the access point 11 needs to belong to this wireless network.
- the access point 11 may be connected to another wired or wireless network (referred to as a second network) different from the wireless network.
- the access point 11 relays communication between the first network and the second network, or relays communication between a plurality of wireless terminals belonging to the first network.
- the access point 11 transmits the data frame received from each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to the wireless terminal in addition to the same first network or transfers it to a second network different from the first network, depending on the destination. To do.
- Uplink Multi-User uplink multi-user
- Uplink multi-user schemes include uplink multi-user MIMO (Uplink Multi-User MIMO: UL-MU-MIMO) or uplink orthogonal frequency division multiple access (UL-OFDMA: Uplink Orthogonal Division Multiple Access).
- UL-OFDMA includes resource unit-based UL-OFDMA and channel-based UL-OFDMA. The latter is sometimes referred to as uplink multi-user multi-channel (UL-MU-MC).
- the UL-MU transmission performed in this embodiment may be any of these schemes.
- Fig. 2 (A) shows the outline of UL-MU-MIMO transmission.
- a plurality of wireless terminals 1 to 4 (STA1 to STA4) simultaneously transmit frames to the access point (AP) in the same frequency band (channel 1 in the figure).
- the access point receives these frames at the same time and separates them into frames of each wireless terminal by performing MIMO demodulation.
- frames can be transmitted simultaneously from a plurality of wireless terminals, so that system throughput can be improved.
- the maximum number of data streams that can be multiplexed for UL-MU-MIMO transmission is limited by the number of antennas at the access point. In the case of the example in FIG.
- each wireless terminal has one antenna and can transmit only one data stream, each access point can simultaneously communicate with up to four terminals.
- a single wireless terminal can be equipped with a plurality of antennas to transmit a plurality of data streams (MIMO transmission).
- Figure 2 (B) shows an overview of UL-MU-MC transmission.
- An access point (AP) assigns a plurality of channels 1 to 4 to a plurality of wireless terminals 1 to 4 (STA1 to 4), respectively, and simultaneously transmits from the plurality of wireless terminals 1 to 4 on the assigned channels. That is, wireless terminals 1 to 4 perform OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) transmission using channels 1 to 4, respectively.
- the channels assigned to each wireless terminal are different from each other.
- the plurality of channels used in OFDMA transmission may be all channels used as a wireless communication system or some of the channels. One or more channels may be allocated to each wireless terminal.
- the allocated channels may be channels that are continuous in the frequency domain or channels that are separated from each other. If eight channels that can be allocated exist and one channel is allocated to one wireless terminal, the maximum number of terminals that can communicate simultaneously is eight.
- the access point extracts a channel signal for each wireless terminal from a frame received simultaneously from each wireless terminal by filtering or the like, and performs processing of the physical layer including demodulation and decoding on the extracted signal to each wireless terminal. Get the frame sent by.
- resource units (which may be called subchannels, resource blocks, frequency blocks, etc.) including one or a plurality of subcarriers are allocated to terminals as communication resources, Communicate simultaneously with other terminals.
- Resource unit is a frequency component that is the minimum unit of resources for communication.
- FIG. 21 shows resource units (RU # 1, RU # 2,... RU # K) secured in a continuous frequency region in one channel (denoted as channel M here).
- a plurality of subcarriers orthogonal to each other are arranged in channel M, and a plurality of resource units including one or more subcarriers are defined in channel M.
- One or more subcarriers may be arranged between resource units, but guard subcarriers are not essential.
- Each resource unit or each subcarrier in the channel may be set with identification information for identifying the resource unit or subcarrier.
- the bandwidth of one channel is, for example, 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, but is not limited thereto.
- a plurality of 20 MHz channels may be combined into one channel. Depending on the bandwidth, the number of subcarriers or resource units in the channel may be different. Multiple terminals simultaneously use different resource units, thereby realizing OFDMA communication.
- FIG. 22 schematically shows an example of an arrangement pattern of resource units in one channel.
- the horizontal direction along the plane of the paper corresponds to the frequency domain direction.
- FIG. 22A shows an example in which a plurality of resource units (RU # 1, RU # 2,... RU # K) having the same bandwidth are arranged.
- FIG. 22B shows an example in which a plurality of resource units (RU # 11-1, RU # 11-2,..., RU # 11-L) having a larger bandwidth than that in FIG. .
- FIG. 22C shows an example in which resource units having three or more bandwidths are arranged.
- the resource units (RU # 12-1, RU # 12-2) have the largest bandwidth, and the resource unit RU # 11- (L-1) has the same bandwidth and resources as the resource unit of FIG.
- the units (RU # K-1, RU # K) have the same bandwidth as the resource unit in FIG.
- the number of resource units that each terminal uses in OFDMA is one or more, and is not limited to a specific value.
- a terminal uses a plurality of resource units a plurality of resource units that are continuous in frequency may be bonded to be used as one resource unit, or a plurality of resource units in remote locations may be used. Also good.
- Resource unit # 11-1 in FIG. 22B may be considered as an example of a resource unit in which resource units # 1 and # 2 in FIG.
- Subcarriers in one resource unit may be continuous in the frequency domain, or a resource unit may be defined from a plurality of subcarriers arranged discontinuously.
- the number of channels used in OFDMA is not limited to one.
- another channel (see channel N in FIG. 21) arranged at a position distant from the frequency domain may be used in the same manner as channel M.
- Resource units may be secured and resource units in both channel M and channel N may be used.
- the channel M and channel N may have the same or different resource unit arrangement method.
- the bandwidth of one channel is 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, or the like as described above, but is not limited thereto. It is possible to use more than two channels. It is also possible to consider channel M and channel N as one channel.
- a terminal that implements OFDMA has at least a channel with a basic channel width (20 MHz channel width if a terminal that supports IEEE802.11a / b / g / n / ac standard is a legacy terminal) of a legacy terminal that is subject to backward compatibility. It is assumed that a physical packet including a frame can be received and decoded (including demodulation and decoding of an error correction code). Carrier sense is performed in units of basic channel width.
- the carrier sense includes CCA (Clear Channel Asset) busy / idle physical carrier sense (Physical Carrier Sense) and virtual carrier sense based on the media reservation time described in the received frame (Virtual Carrier Sense). Sense) may be included.
- CCA Cycal Channel Asset
- Physical Carrier Sense Physical Carrier Sense
- Virtual Carrier Sense Virtual Carrier Sense
- Sense virtual carrier sense based on the media reservation time described in the received frame
- NAV Network Allocation Vector
- the carrier sense information based on CCA or NAV performed for each channel may be commonly applied to all resource units in the channel. For example, all resource units belonging to a channel whose carrier sense information indicates idle may be determined as idle.
- a scheme combining UL-MU-MIMO and UL-OFDMA may be executed as uplink multi-user communication.
- UL-OFDMA & MU-MIMO performs MU-MIMO transmission for each resource unit or channel by using the same resource unit or channel between a plurality of terminals.
- the access point 11 and the wireless terminals 1 to 4 establish wireless links to exchange parameters necessary for communication and grasp each other's capabilities. Therefore, the access point 11 establishes a wireless link with the wireless terminals 1 to 4 so that the wireless terminals 1 to 4 can perform UL-MU-MIMO transmission or UL-OFDMA (channel-based UL-OFDMA (UL-MU- MC) or resource unit based UL-OFDMA) transmission can be grasped.
- UL-MU-MIMO channel-based UL-OFDMA (UL-MU- MC) or resource unit based UL-OFDMA
- UL-MU-MC channel-based UL-OFDMA
- resource unit-based UL-OFDMA resource unit-based UL-OFDMA
- wireless terminals 1 to 4 are shown. However, in addition to the illustrated wireless terminals 1 to 4, there may be other wireless terminals that establish a wireless link with the access point 11.
- FIG. 3 shows an example of an operation sequence between the access point 11 and the wireless terminals 1 to 3 shown in FIG. Assume that the wireless terminals 1 to 4 each have data to be transmitted to the access point 11 and perform UL-MU transmission from the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to the access point 11.
- the section indicated by a solid arrow extending in the horizontal direction represents a short interframe space (SIFS), and the section indicated by a thick arrow is a distributed coordination function interframe (DIFS) and CSMA / CA backoff. This represents the total (carrier sense time) with (BackOff) time.
- SIFS and DIFS are examples, and other times (frame intervals) may be used as long as they are predetermined times. Details of SIFS and DIFS will be described in another embodiment.
- a request phase from the transmission of the request frame 21 by the wireless terminal 1 to the completion of the transmission of the notification frame 28 by the access point 11 and the BlockACK frame after the transmission of the notification frame 28 is completed. It has a data transmission phase (Data Transmission Phase) until transmission is completed.
- each wireless terminal transmits a request frame as a response to the inquiry frame 22 or the polling frame transmitted from the access point. That is, the access point causes each wireless terminal to transmit a request frame by central control type access control.
- the wireless terminal 1 transmits a request frame 21 for requesting permission for data transmission to the access point 11 in order to request transmission by UL-MU transmission.
- the wireless terminal 1 performs carrier sense during DIFS and a randomly determined backoff time, and acquires a transmission right.
- the wireless terminals 2 to 4 also have data for uplink transmission, and each attempt to acquire a transmission right for transmitting a request frame.
- the wireless terminal 1 transmits a request frame 21 during TXOP (Transmission Opportunity).
- the request frame 21 is a frame that triggers the access point 11 to execute the UL-MU transmission, and may be referred to as a trigger request frame.
- a wireless terminal that has transmitted a trigger request frame may be referred to as a trigger terminal.
- the request frame can be defined based on a general MAC frame format.
- FIG. 4 shows the basic form of the MAC frame format.
- the basic form of the MAC frame format consists of a frame control field, a duration field, an address field 1 to 3, a sequence control field, an address 4 field, a data field, and a check-sum field.
- FIG. 4 shows a general frame structure, and some fields may not exist depending on the frame.
- a type (Type) field for distinguishing three frame types of a data frame (Data frame), a management frame (Management frame), and a control frame (Control frame) is provided.
- a subtype field is provided in the frame control field.
- the type is a value representing a control frame
- the value of the subtype is a value newly defined for the request frame.
- a configuration in which the frame type of the request frame is not a control frame but a management frame or a data frame is not excluded. Details of the control frame, the management frame, and the data frame will be described in another embodiment.
- the media reservation time is set in the duration field.
- a frame addressed to another wireless terminal not addressed to itself
- NAV Network Allocation Vector
- Such a mechanism for virtually determining that a medium is busy, or a period during which a medium is virtually busy is referred to as NAV (Network Allocation Vector).
- NAV Network Allocation Vector
- sequence control field a frame sequence number and the like are set.
- the address 1 field set the receiving address (RA) of the frame. Since the access destination of the request frame is the access point 11, the address of the access point 11 is set in the address 1 field. The address of the access point 11 is specifically the MAC address or BSSID of the access point 11.
- the address (TA) of the frame transmission source is set in the address 2 field. Since the transmission source of the request frame is the wireless terminal 1, the MAC address of the wireless terminal 1 may be set in the address 2 field.
- FCS Full Check Sequence
- FCS information is set as a checksum code used for detecting an error in the frame body portion on the receiving side. Examples of FCS information include CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Code).
- the address of the transmission source terminal or the transmission destination terminal is set according to the type of frame. One or both of these may be omitted.
- arbitrary information to be notified to the destination device in the case of a request frame, access point 11 is set.
- a value indicating a data size desired for uplink transmission or a communication delay (allowable delay) value allowed by an application may be set.
- the desired number of streams, or the number of channels and the channel number may be set.
- the access point 11 determines execution of UL-MU transmission. In preparation for UL-MU transmission, the access point 11 checks whether there is a wireless terminal having data for uplink transmission other than the wireless terminal 1 that transmitted the request frame 21. A wireless terminal (transmission candidate terminal) that inquires whether or not it has the data is selected. The access point 11 establishes a wireless link and selects one or a plurality of wireless terminals other than the wireless terminal 1 from wireless terminals corresponding to UL-MU transmission. The access point 11 can use the identifier of the selected wireless terminal as information for specifying the selected wireless terminal (transmission candidate terminal).
- the access point 11 sets the identifier of the selected wireless terminal in the inquiry frame 22 that inquires whether there is a data transmission request. Specifically, it is set in the terminal information field for each selected wireless terminal in the inquiry frame 22.
- the total number of radio terminals and radio terminals 1 to be selected may be the same value as the maximum multiplexable number or desired multiplex number of UL-MU transmission, or may be larger or smaller.
- the wireless terminal to be selected may be determined by an arbitrary method.
- the selection method may be a round robin method or a random selection method.
- select a wireless terminal having data that is predicted to be the same or close in size as the wireless terminal 1 for example, a wireless terminal that has transmitted data having the same or close size as the wireless terminal 1 within a period retroactive from the current time).
- a combination of wireless terminals having a small spatial correlation small interference
- the inquiry frame 22 may be defined based on the general MAC frame format shown in FIG. 4 in the same manner as the request frame.
- the frame control field type may be a value representing a control frame, and the subtype value may be a newly defined value for the inquiry frame.
- the receiving address may be a broadcast address or a multicast address and set in the address 1 field.
- the source address may be the address of the access point 11 and set in the address 2 field.
- the data field is provided with a terminal information field for each selected wireless terminal (transmission candidate terminal), and the identifier of the selected wireless terminal is set in the corresponding terminal information field.
- FIG. 5 shows an example of a terminal information field for each wireless terminal. From the terminal information field 1 (STA info 1) to the terminal information field n (STA info n), n terminal information fields are indicated.
- the number of terminal information fields may be the same as the selected number of terminals.
- the identifier of the wireless terminal may be the MAC address of the wireless terminal, an association ID (AID) assigned by the access point 11 at the time of association, or any other ID unique among the terminals. Further, if there is information to be individually notified to the selected wireless terminal, the information may be set in the terminal information field.
- the access point 11 when selecting a plurality of wireless terminals, sets the identifier of the wireless terminal that transmits the request frame in the terminal information field at a predetermined position as a response to the inquiry frame 22. As an example, it is set in the head terminal information field (STA info 1). In the following, the description will be continued assuming this.
- the request frame is transmitted as a response to the polling frame by transmitting the polling frame in order after the inquiry frame 22 is transmitted.
- a request frame is transmitted as a response to the inquiry frame 22 so that an inquiry by a polling frame can be made unnecessary.
- the possibility of reliably transmitting the request frame can be increased for the leading wireless terminal.
- the end wireless terminal may not be given an opportunity to transmit the request frame after the recruitment period ends in the middle of request frame collection processing (for example, the first wireless terminal or the subsequent wireless terminal For example, when the wireless terminal repeatedly resends the request frame).
- the access point 11 transmits an inquiry frame 22 having the above-described format after SIFS from the completion of reception of the request frame 21.
- the wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame 22 transmitted from the access point 11 confirms whether its own apparatus is specified in the head terminal information field.
- a request frame is generated and transmitted to the access point 11 after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22 (first operation). If it is not specified in the first terminal information field, check whether it is specified in one of the other terminal information fields. If the local device is specified in one of the other terminal information fields, then The reception of the polling frame transmitted from the access point 11 is awaited.
- the wireless terminal when receiving the polling frame from the access point 11, transmits a request frame (second operation). As described above, the wireless terminal selects the first operation or the second operation based on the inquiry frame 22, and executes the selected operation. If it is specified in a field other than the first terminal information field, check the number of the first terminal information field from the first terminal information field (that is, the priority of the own device) and check the priority. In response to this, a time until transmission of a polling frame transmitted from the access point 11 is calculated may be calculated, and during that time, a transition may be made to a low power consumption state such as a power save mode.
- a low power consumption state such as a power save mode
- the access point 11 sequentially transmits polling frames from the wireless terminal specified in the next terminal information field at the head, and the lengths of the polling frame and the request frame are fixed. Therefore, the wireless terminal can calculate the earliest timing at which the polling frame is transmitted to its own device.
- the wireless terminal 2 is specified in the terminal information field 1 at the head of the inquiry frame 22, and the wireless terminal 2 notifies the presence / absence of a data transmission request after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22.
- the request frame 23 is transmitted to the access point 11. That is, the wireless terminal 2 performs a first operation of transmitting a request frame after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22.
- the format of the request frame 23 may be the same as or different from the format of the request frame 21 (trigger request frame). For example, a field indicating whether or not there is data for uplink transmission (transmission data presence / absence field) may be added to the format of the request frame 21. When there is data for uplink transmission, a bit is set in the transmission data presence / absence field, and when there is no such data, the bit of the transmission data presence / absence field is turned off. The access point 11 that has received the request frame 23 checks whether a bit is set in the field, and only when the bit is set, the data size field, the allowable delay field, and the like (if these fields exist) You may make it confirm.
- the data for uplink transmission exists by setting the value of the data size field to 0 It may be notified to the access point 11 that it will not. Note that a transmission data presence / absence field may also exist in the trigger request frame (request frame 21).
- the wireless terminals 3 and 4 confirm that their own identifiers are not specified in the first terminal information field 1 of the inquiry frame 22 and are specified in the second and third terminal information fields 2 and 3, respectively. To do.
- the access point 11 that has received the request frame 23 from the wireless terminal 2 analyzes the request frame 23 and grasps that the wireless terminal 2 has data for uplink transmission. In addition, according to the frame format of the request frame 23, the data size or allowable delay is also grasped.
- the access point 11 transmits a polling frame 24 instructing transmission of a request frame to the wireless terminal 3 specified in the second terminal information field 2 after SIFS from completion of reception of the request frame 23.
- the polling frame 24 may be defined based on the general MAC frame format shown in FIG.
- the frame control field type may be a value representing a control frame, and the subtype value may be a newly defined value for a polling frame.
- the reception destination address may be the MAC address of the polling frame transmission destination (in this example, the wireless terminal 3) and may be set in the address 1 field.
- the source address may be the address of the access point 11 and set in the address 2 field.
- the identifier of the wireless terminal 3 may be set to explicitly notify that the wireless terminal 3 is designated, or the receiving address of the polling frame 24 is the wireless terminal 3. Since it is understood that the wireless terminal 3 is designated, the data field itself can be omitted.
- the wireless terminal 3 that has received the polling frame 24 transmits a request frame 25 after SIFS from completion of reception. That is, the wireless terminal 3 performs a second operation of transmitting a request frame after SIFS from completion of reception of the polling frame. Details of the request frame 25 are the same as those of the request frame 23, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
- the access point 11 that has received the request frame 25 from the wireless terminal 3 analyzes the request frame 25 and grasps that the wireless terminal 3 has data for uplink transmission. In addition, according to the frame format of the request frame 25, the data size or allowable delay is also grasped. Next, the access point 11 transmits a polling frame 26 instructing transmission of a request frame to the wireless terminal 4 specified in the third terminal information field 3 in the same manner as in the wireless terminal 3.
- the wireless terminal 4 that has received the polling frame 26 transmits a request frame 27 after SIFS from completion of reception. That is, the wireless terminal 4 performs a second operation of transmitting a request frame after SIFS from the completion of polling frame reception.
- the details of the request frame 27 are the same as those of the request frames 23 and 25, and thus description thereof is omitted.
- the access point 11 that has received the request frame 27 from the wireless terminal 4 analyzes the request frame 27 and grasps that the wireless terminal 4 has data for uplink transmission. Further, the data size or allowable delay is also grasped according to the frame format of the request frame 27.
- the access point 11 ends the recruitment period and stops receiving the request frame.
- the access point 11 selects a wireless terminal that is a target device that is permitted to transmit UL-MU, and transmits a notification frame 28 that designates the selected wireless terminal that is a trigger for starting UL-MU transmission.
- a predetermined condition there is a case where a predetermined time (time limit) has been reached after the transmission of the inquiry frame 21 is completed.
- a predetermined time time limit
- the wireless terminal that has notified the request frame that it has data for uplink transmission may match a predetermined value including the trigger terminal.
- a field for storing the time limit may be prepared in the inquiry frame 22, and the time limit of the recruitment period may be notified in this field. Even if there is data for uplink transmission, the wireless terminal specified by the inquiry frame does not receive the polling frame at the timing when reception at the access point 11 is in time by the time limit (or when the time limit elapses) May determine that the own device does not participate in the current UL-MU transmission, and release the waiting for polling frame reception.
- the access point 11 since the access point 11 has received the request frames 23, 25, and 27 from all of the wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame 22, the recruitment period ends.
- the access point 11 may select all the wireless terminals (including the trigger terminal) that transmitted the request frame as long as the wireless terminal is allowed to transmit UL-MU as long as it is below the maximum value that can be multiplexed.
- the wireless terminals that are allowed to transmit UL-MU may be narrowed down according to an arbitrary standard. For example, the wireless terminal with the largest transmission data size may be preferentially selected, or the wireless terminal having data with a high degree of urgency may be preferentially selected. In the latter case, it is assumed that the urgency of data or the type of data is also notified in the request frame.
- the access point 11 After completing the recruitment period, the access point 11 performs carrier sense according to CSAM / CA access control to acquire a transmission right, and transmits a UL-MU transmission during TXOP (Transmission Opportunity).
- a notification frame 28 serving as a trigger is transmitted.
- the reception period ends when reception of the request frame 27 is completed, carrier sense is performed from that point, a transmission right is acquired, and a notification frame 28 is generated.
- the access point 11 may transmit the notification frame 28 after SIFS from the completion of reception of the last received request frame 27.
- the notification frame 28 may be defined on the basis of the general MAC frame format shown in FIG. 4 in the same manner as the request frame, the inquiry frame, and the polling frame.
- the frame control field type may be a value representing a control frame, and the subtype value may be a newly defined value for the notification frame.
- the receiving address may be a broadcast address or a multicast address and set in the address 1 field.
- the source address may be the address of the access point 11 and set in the address 2 field.
- terminal information fields corresponding to the number of terminals permitted to transmit UL-MU are set as shown in FIG.
- each terminal information field 1 to 4 is set in order to allow the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to transmit UL-MU.
- information such as identifiers of wireless terminals permitted to transmit, and parameter information for transmission is set as necessary.
- the identifier of the wireless terminal set in the terminal information field may be the MAC address of the terminal, an association ID (AID), or other ID that is unique among terminals.
- information individually notified to the wireless terminal such as parameter information used by the wireless terminal at the time of UL-MU transmission, may be set.
- parameter information include at least one of a data length that permits transmission, a period during which transmission is permitted, an error correction code scheme, and an MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) that defines a transmission rate.
- information on one or a plurality of channels assigned to the corresponding wireless terminal may be notified as parameter information.
- the channel information may be specified by a channel number, for example.
- the number of channels from a specific channel to the high frequency side or the low frequency side or how many frequency bands from the specific channel may be specified.
- information on resource units to be allocated to wireless terminals may be reported as parameter information instead of channel information or together with channel information.
- the notification frame 28 may notify the number of streams permitted to be transmitted to the wireless terminal. It is assumed that the number of streams that can be supported by the wireless terminal has already been acquired as capability information of the terminal.
- the notification frame 28 may be provided with a common information field for notifying common information (Common Information) between wireless terminals permitted to transmit.
- Common Information Common Information
- information that is commonly notified to a group of terminals permitted to transmit is set. For example, the transmission data size permitted for each wireless terminal, the type of transmission data permitted for each wireless terminal, the format of the terminal information field, and the like may be set as common values in this field.
- the access point 11 simultaneously receives signals transmitted from the wireless terminals 1 to 4. That is, the transmission timings of the data frames transmitted by the wireless terminals 1 to 4 are synchronized with each other, and are transmitted from the wireless terminals 1 to 4 by frequency multiplexing or spatial multiplexing (that is, channel-based or resource unit-based OFDMA or UL-MU). -MIMO transmission). If the data transmitted by the wireless terminal in UL-MU is less than the data size specified in the terminal information field or common information field, insufficient padding data may be added, which corresponds to the shortage. During this time, no transmission operation may be performed.
- a preamble having a pattern orthogonal to each other between these wireless terminals may be added.
- any of temporal, frequency, and coding methods can be used.
- the preamble field is divided into a plurality of sections, and the preamble of each terminal is transmitted in a different section. In any section, only one terminal transmits the preamble. That is, while a certain terminal transmits a preamble, there is a period during which no other terminal transmits anything.
- each terminal transmits a preamble signal at a frequency that is orthogonal to each other.
- each terminal transmits a signal in which value strings (more specifically, symbol strings corresponding to the value strings) included in different rows (or different columns) of the orthogonal matrix are arranged. Each row (or each column) of the orthogonal matrix is orthogonal to each other.
- the access point 11 can identify the preamble of each terminal.
- the access point In order for each terminal to use a preamble that is orthogonal to each other, the access point needs to give information on the preamble used by each terminal and its transmission method. Specifically, in the case of time orthogonality, Transmit the preamble (preamble may be the same or different between terminals) at the timing, or in the case of frequency orthogonal, at which frequency the preamble (preamble signal may be the same between terminals or different In the case of code orthogonality, information on which coding pattern (which row or column pattern of the orthogonal matrix) is used to transmit the preamble is required.
- Fig. 6 shows an example of a physical packet format.
- Fields (L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, VHT-SIG-A, VHT-STF, VHT-SIG-B) corresponding to the physical header and fields for setting MAC frames (here, data frames) ( DATA field).
- L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, and VHT-SIG-A are the same in all wireless terminals.
- L-SIG and VHT-SIG-A can be demodulated using L-LTF symbols.
- L-SIG describes the data length, modulation method, and the like.
- VHT-SIG-A describes information of terminals 1 to 4 such as the number of streams of each of wireless terminals 1 to 4 and the coding (error correction code such as BCC or LDPC) method. Since L-SIG and VHT-SIG-A cannot be spatially separated between terminals, the values of L-SIG and VHT-SIG-A of each wireless terminal must be the same. For this reason, the access point 11 notifies the number of streams and the coding method of each wireless terminal in a notification frame, and each wireless terminal uses the same information of other wireless terminals and uses the same VHT-SIG-A symbol. Generate with content. A value that can be set in L-SIG may be determined in advance by the system, or may be notified by a notification frame if necessary.
- the VHT-STF symbols are the same in the wireless terminals 1 to 4, but the VHT-LTF needs to have preamble patterns orthogonal to each other in the wireless terminals 1 to 4 in order to spatially separate subsequent fields. There is. Therefore, in the terminal information fields 1 to 4 in the notification frame, preamble patterns that are orthogonal to each other are designated by the wireless terminals 1 to 4.
- each user wireless terminal
- the VHT-LTF preamble pattern need not be orthogonal. Therefore, a preamble pattern common to each wireless terminal may be specified in the common information field of the notification frame or the like, and a preamble pattern arbitrarily determined for each wireless terminal is specified in each terminal information field of the notification frame. May be.
- the access point may notify the wireless terminal of the preamble pattern with an arbitrary management frame when establishing a wireless link with the wireless terminal.
- the value of VHT-SIG-A does not need to be aligned with other wireless terminals, and only the value of the own device need be described.
- the access point 11 acquires uplink propagation path information between each antenna of each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 and the access point 11 antenna, and uses this propagation path information.
- the VHT-SIG-B and the MAC frame portion (DATA field) after the preamble can be demodulated.
- MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
- the access point 11 when the access point 11 receives signals transmitted from the radio terminals 1 to 4 in the uplink, the access point 11 performs signal reception processing according to the UL-MU method to be used, and further performs physical layer processing such as demodulation. To obtain a data frame of each wireless terminal. Then, for each data frame, based on the FCS information, whether or not the data frame has been normally received is inspected, and confirmation response information indicating a result of whether or not the data frame has been normally received is generated. The access point 11 generates a BlockACK frame 33 including the confirmation response information of each wireless terminal, and transmits the generated BlockACK frame 33 to the wireless terminals 1 to 4 that transmitted the data frame by UL-MU.
- the wireless terminals 1 to 4 detect their own acknowledgment response information from the BlockACK frame received from the access point 11 and grasp whether or not the data frame has been successfully transmitted.
- the Block ACK frame is transmitted as a response to the UL-MU transmission from the access point 11, but instead of transmitting the Block ACK frame, an ACK frame may be individually returned to the wireless terminal that has successfully received the data frame. .
- An ACK frame is not returned to the wireless terminal that has not successfully received the data frame.
- the terminal that has received the ACK frame determines that transmission of the data frame has succeeded, and the terminal that has not received the ACK frame determines that transmission of the data frame has failed.
- the access point 11 can also transmit an aggregation frame (which may be called a super frame) in which a plurality of frames including the inspection result of each wireless terminal are aggregated.
- FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the wireless communication device mounted on the access point 11. As described above, the access point 11 may be connected to a network other than the network on the wireless terminals 1 to 4 side. FIG. 7 shows a device configuration connected to the networks on the wireless terminals 1 to 4 side.
- the control unit 101 corresponds to a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit that controls communication with a wireless terminal
- the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103 are, for example, a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated unit that transmits and receives a frame via an antenna.
- All or part of the processing of the control unit 101 and the processing of the digital area of the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103 may be performed by software (program) that operates on a processor such as a CPU, or by hardware. It may be performed by both of these software and hardware.
- the access point may include a processor that performs processing of all or part of the control unit 101, the transmission unit 102, and the reception unit 103.
- the buffer 104 is a storage unit for transferring data frames between the upper layer and the control unit 101.
- the upper layer stores a frame received from another network (for example, data stored in the payload portion of the MAC frame) in the buffer 104 for relaying to the network on the wireless terminal side or received from the network on the wireless terminal side
- the frame data is received from the control unit 101 and transferred to the upper layer.
- the upper layer may perform communication processing higher than the MAC layer, such as TCP / IP and UDP / IP. Further, the upper layer may perform processing of an application layer that processes data.
- the upper layer operation may be performed by software (program) processing by a processor such as a CPU, may be performed by hardware, or may be performed by both software and hardware.
- the control unit 101 mainly performs processing of the MAC layer.
- the control unit 101 manages access to the wireless channel and controls frame transmission at a desired timing.
- the control unit 101 controls communication with each wireless terminal by transmitting and receiving frames via the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103. Further, the control unit 101 may perform control so as to periodically transmit a beacon frame.
- the control unit 101 may include a clock generation unit that generates a clock.
- the control unit 101 may be configured to receive a clock from the outside.
- the control unit 101 may manage the internal time using a clock generated by the clock generation unit or a clock input from the outside.
- the control unit 101 may output the clock generated by the clock generation unit to the outside of the host CPU or the like.
- the control unit 101 receives an association request from a wireless terminal and establishes a wireless link with the wireless terminal through a process such as authentication as necessary.
- the control unit 101 manages information regarding a wireless terminal that has established a wireless link, using an internal or external accessible storage device.
- the control unit 101 When the control unit 101 receives a request frame from an arbitrary wireless terminal connected to the access point, it determines execution of UL-MU transmission. Here, whether to execute UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MC, etc.) or UL-MU-MIMO may be determined in advance as a system, and if the access point can support both types Alternatively, an identifier (method identifier) indicating which method is desired may be set in the request frame, and the control unit 101 may determine based on the method identifier in the request frame. Alternatively, which method is used may be determined by the access point autonomously and notified within the notification frame.
- UL-OFDMA UL-MU-MC, etc.
- UL-MU-MIMO may be determined in advance as a system, and if the access point can support both types Alternatively, an identifier (method identifier) indicating which method is desired may be set in the request frame, and the control unit 101 may determine based on the method identifier in the request frame. Alternatively,
- UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MC or the like) may be determined when the number of usable channels is large, and UL-MU-MIMO or the like may be determined when the number is small.
- UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MC or the like) may be determined when the number of usable channels is large
- UL-MU-MIMO or the like may be determined when the number is small.
- the control unit 101 When determining that UL-MU transmission is to be performed, the control unit 101 performs uplink transmission from a wireless terminal connected to the access point 11 other than the wireless terminal (trigger terminal) that transmitted the request frame. A wireless terminal (transmission terminal candidate) that inquires about whether it has data is selected. The control unit 101 sets an identifier or the like of the selected wireless terminal in each terminal information field and sets other fields (address field or the like) to generate an inquiry frame.
- the control unit 101 transmits the generated inquiry frame from the transmission unit 102 after SIFS from completion of reception of the request frame.
- the carrier sense may be performed during the back-off time determined using DIFS and the subsequent random number, and if the transmission right can be acquired, the inquiry frame may be transmitted from the transmission unit 102 during TXOP.
- the transmission unit 102 performs desired physical layer processing such as addition of a physical header and modulation processing on the frame input from the control unit 101. Further, DA conversion, filter processing for extracting a signal component of a desired band, and frequency conversion are performed on the frame after processing in the physical layer.
- the transmission unit 102 amplifies the frequency-converted signal and radiates it as a radio wave from one antenna or a plurality of antennas. In the illustrated example, one transmission unit is provided, but a plurality of transmission units may be provided, and one antenna may be connected to each transmission unit.
- control unit 101 manages carrier sense information via the receiving unit 103. Specifically, both the physical carrier sense information regarding busy and idle of the medium (CCA) input from the receiving unit 103 and the virtual carrier sense information based on the medium reservation time described in the received frame May be included. If any one of the carrier sense information indicates busy, the medium is regarded as busy, and signal transmission during that time is prohibited.
- CCA carrier sense information regarding busy and idle of the medium
- the signal received by each antenna is amplified in the receiving unit 103, subjected to frequency conversion (down-conversion), and filtered.
- the filtered signal is further converted into a digital signal by AD conversion, and a frame is input to the control unit 201 through physical layer processing such as demodulation.
- the control unit 201 analyzes the frame and performs an operation according to the analysis result.
- a normal frame such as a request frame
- a signal received by any one of a plurality of antennas any antenna or a predetermined antenna
- a frame may be obtained by processing a signal received by each antenna using a diversity technique.
- the received signal may be processed by other methods.
- the control unit 101 When the control unit 101 receives a request frame from the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the head of the inquiry frame, the control unit 101 analyzes the request frame, determines whether there is data for uplink transmission for the wireless terminal, and other requests. Information such as data size and allowable delay is grasped according to the frame format.
- the control unit 101 transmits a polling frame to the wireless terminal specified in the second terminal information field, and receives and analyzes the request frame as a response. Thereafter, similarly, a polling frame is transmitted and a request frame is received and analyzed up to the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the end.
- a time limit may be set in advance. In this case, when the time limit is reached, the collection of request frames is terminated.
- the control unit 101 selects a wireless terminal that performs UL-MU transmission from the trigger terminal and the wireless terminal that transmitted the request frame to the polling frame.
- the control unit 101 generates a notification frame in which the identifier of the selected wireless terminal and the parameter information for UL-MU transmission are set in the terminal information field, and transmits the generated notification frame.
- UL-MU-MIMO transmission When UL-MU-MIMO transmission is performed as UL-MU transmission, a signal transmitted by UL-MU-MIMO is received by the receiving unit 103, and MIMO demodulation is performed based on propagation path information with each wireless terminal. By doing so, it is separated into data frames for each wireless terminal. The separated data frame is sent to the control unit 101.
- one receiving unit is provided, but a plurality of receiving units may be arranged, and one antenna may be commonly connected to the corresponding transmitting unit for each receiving unit.
- the received signal is received by the receiving unit 103 and received.
- a data frame for each wireless terminal is obtained by extracting a channel component for each wireless terminal or a signal component of a resource unit for each wireless terminal from the signal and performing physical layer processing including processing such as demodulation.
- the acquired data frame is sent to the control unit 101.
- the control unit 101 has a function of controlling each band of the transmission filter and the reception filter in the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103.
- control unit 101 may read information by accessing a storage device that stores information notified to each wireless terminal, information notified from each wireless terminal, or both.
- the storage device may be an internal memory or an external memory, and may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory.
- the storage device may be an SSD, a hard disk, or the like.
- the above-described separation of the processing of the control unit 101 and the transmission unit 102 is an example, and a mode different from the above-described mode is possible.
- processing up to the digital domain and DA conversion may be performed by the control unit 101, and processing after DA conversion may be performed by the transmission unit 102.
- processing between the control unit 101 and the reception unit 103 is performed by the reception unit 103 before the AD conversion, and the control unit 101 performs the processing of the digital area including the processing after the AD conversion. May be.
- the baseband integrated circuit includes a control unit 101, a part that performs physical layer processing in the transmission unit 102, a part that performs DA conversion, and a part that performs processing after AD conversion in the reception unit 103.
- the RF integrated circuit corresponds to a part that performs processing after DA conversion in the transmission unit 102 and a part that performs processing before AD conversion in the reception unit 103.
- the integrated circuit for wireless communication according to this embodiment includes at least a baseband integrated circuit among a baseband integrated circuit and an RF integrated circuit. Processing between blocks or processing between the baseband integrated circuit and the RF integrated circuit may be separated by a method other than that described here.
- FIG. 8 is a functional block diagram of a wireless communication device mounted on the wireless terminal 1.
- the wireless communication devices mounted on the wireless terminals 2 to 4 have the same configuration as that of the wireless terminal 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
- the control unit 201 corresponds to a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit that controls communication with the access point 11, and the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203 form, as an example, a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated circuit that transmits and receives frames.
- All or part of the processing of the control unit 201 and the processing of the digital area of the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203 may be performed by software (program) that operates on a processor such as a CPU, or by hardware. It may be performed by both of these software and hardware.
- the terminal may include a processor that performs processing of all or part of the control unit 201, the transmission unit 202, and the reception unit 203.
- the buffer 204 is a storage unit for transferring data between the upper layer and the control unit 201.
- the upper layer generates data to be transmitted to another wireless terminal, the access point 11, or a device on another network, and stores the data in the buffer 204 or receives frame data received from the network on the wireless terminal side as a buffer. Or via 201.
- the upper layer may perform communication processing above the MAC layer such as TCP / IP and UDP / IP, and may further perform processing of an application layer that processes data.
- the upper layer processing may be performed by software (program) that operates on a processor such as a CPU, may be performed by hardware, or may be performed by both software and hardware.
- the control unit 201 mainly performs MAC layer processing.
- the control unit 201 controls communication with the access point 11 by transmitting and receiving frames to and from the access point 11 via the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203.
- the control unit 201 receives a beacon frame periodically transmitted from the access point 11, for example, via the antenna 1A and the reception unit 203.
- the control unit 201 may include a clock generation unit.
- the control unit 201 may be configured to receive a clock from the outside.
- the control unit 201 may manage the internal time by the clock.
- the clock generated by the clock generation unit may be output to the outside.
- control unit 201 receives a beacon frame, makes an association request to the access point 11, and establishes a wireless link with the access point 11 through a process such as authentication as necessary.
- the control unit 201 When the data for uplink transmission occurs, the control unit 201 generates a request frame (trigger request frame) for UL-MU transmission and transmits it to the access point.
- a request frame In order to transmit a request frame, first, carrier sense is performed during DIFS and a randomly determined backoff time, a transmission right is acquired according to the carrier sense result, and a request frame is transmitted during TXOP.
- the request frame may include information such as the identifier of the own device, the data size, and the allowable delay in the data field.
- the transmission unit 202 performs processing of a desired physical layer such as addition of a physical header or modulation processing on the frame input from the control unit 201. Further, DA conversion, filter processing for extracting a signal component in a desired band, and frequency conversion (up-conversion) are performed on the frame after processing in the physical layer.
- the transmitting unit 202 amplifies the frequency-converted signal and radiates it as a radio wave from the antenna to the space.
- the signal received by the antenna 1A is processed by the receiving unit 203.
- a signal such as an inquiry frame, a polling frame, or a notification frame is received from the access point 11 and processed by the receiving unit 203. That is, the received signal is amplified by the receiving unit 203, subjected to frequency conversion (down-conversion), and a desired band component is extracted by the filering process.
- the extracted signal is further subjected to physical layer processing including AD conversion and demodulation, and a frame is input to the control unit 201.
- the control unit 201 analyzes the input frame and performs an operation according to the analysis result.
- control unit 201 when the control unit 201 receives an inquiry frame from the access point 11, it checks whether the identifier of the own device is set in the head terminal information field. When the identifier of the own device is set in the first terminal information field, the request frame is generated by checking the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, etc. based on the state of the buffer 204. The control unit 201 transmits the generated request frame after SIFS from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame. If the identifier of the own device is not set in the first terminal information field, it is checked whether the identifier of the own device is set in the second and subsequent terminal information fields, and if the identifier of the own device is set Wait for polling frame reception.
- control unit 201 When the control unit 201 receives a polling frame from the access point 11, the control unit 201 checks the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, and the like based on the state of the buffer 205, and generates a request frame. The control unit 201 transmits the generated request frame after SIFS from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame.
- the control unit 201 when the control unit 201 receives the notification frame from the access point 11, it checks whether or not the own device is designated as a UL-MU transmission target terminal. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the identifier of the own device is set in any of the terminal information fields, and if it is set, the own device is designated as a target terminal for UL-MU transmission. Judge that In this case, data is read from the buffer 204, a data frame is constructed, and the data frame is transmitted via the transmission unit 202 and the antenna 1A. At this time, the control unit 201 determines the data size or time length to be transmitted based on the parameter information specified in the terminal information field of the notification frame, and sends parameter information necessary for transmission processing to the transmission unit 202. Is specified.
- the transmission unit 202 performs physical layer processing using the specified parameter information.
- the control unit 201 transmits a data frame after a predetermined time such as SIFS from the completion of reception of the notification frame, whereby the data frame is transmitted at the same timing as other wireless terminals specified in the notification frame (UL -MU transmission).
- the control unit 201 has a function of controlling each band of the transmission filter and the reception filter in the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203.
- the control unit 201 may read information by accessing a storage device for storing information notified to the access point 11, information notified from the access point 11, or both.
- the storage device may be an internal memory or an external memory, and may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory. In addition to the memory, the storage device may be an SSD, a hard disk, or the like.
- the above-described separation of the processing of the control unit 201 and the transmission unit 202 is an example, and a mode different from the above-described mode is possible.
- processing up to the digital domain and DA conversion may be performed by the control unit 201, and processing after DA conversion may be performed by the transmission unit 202.
- processing of the control unit 201 and the reception unit 203 is performed by the reception unit 203 performing processing before AD conversion, and the control unit 201 performs processing of the digital area including processing after AD conversion. Also good.
- the baseband integrated circuit includes a control unit 201, a part that performs physical layer processing in the transmission unit 202, a part that performs DA conversion, and a part that performs processing after AD conversion in the reception unit 203.
- the RF integrated circuit corresponds to a part that performs processing after DA conversion in the transmission unit 202 and a part that performs processing before AD conversion in the reception unit 203.
- the integrated circuit for wireless communication according to this embodiment includes at least a baseband integrated circuit among a baseband integrated circuit and an RF integrated circuit. Processing between blocks or processing between the baseband integrated circuit and the RF integrated circuit may be separated by a method other than that described here.
- FIG. 9 is a flowchart of an operation example of the access point according to the first embodiment.
- the access point 11 When the access point 11 receives a request frame from an arbitrary wireless terminal (trigger terminal) connected to the access point, the access point 11 determines to execute UL-MU transmission (S101). The access point 11 selects a wireless terminal (transmission terminal candidate) that inquires whether it has data for uplink transmission from among the connected wireless terminals that support UL-MU transmission and that have data for uplink transmission. . Then, an inquiry frame is generated by setting the identifier or the like of the selected wireless terminal in each terminal information field (S102). The access point 11 transmits the generated inquiry frame after SIFS from the completion of receiving the request frame (S102).
- the access point waits for a request frame from the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the head of the inquiry frame, and receives and analyzes the request frame (S103).
- the access point transmits a polling frame to the wireless terminal specified in the second terminal information field, and receives and analyzes a request frame from the wireless terminal.
- transmission of polling frames and reception and analysis of request frames are sequentially performed (S104).
- the recruitment period may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied midway, for example, when a certain period of time has elapsed after completion of transmission of the inquiry frame. That is, the request frame collection process (transmitting a polling frame and receiving a request frame as a response thereto) may be aborted.
- the access point 11 selects the UL-MU transmission target terminal (target apparatus) from the trigger terminal and the wireless terminal that has transmitted the request frame to the polling frame (S105).
- the access point 11 generates a notification frame in which the identifier of the selected wireless terminal and the parameter information for UL-MU transmission are set in the terminal information field, and transmits the generated notification frame (S105).
- the access point 11 transmits simultaneously from each wireless terminal specified in the notification frame after completion of transmission of the notification frame (channel-based UL-OFDMA (MU-MC), resource unit-based UL-OFDMA, or UL-MU).
- MU-MC channel-based UL-OFDMA
- UL-MU resource unit-based UL-OFDMA
- UL-MU resource unit-based UL-OFDMA
- FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the wireless terminal according to the present embodiment. Here, an operation example in the case where the wireless terminal is not a trigger terminal but a wireless terminal specified by an inquiry frame is shown.
- the wireless terminal When the wireless terminal receives the inquiry frame from the access point 11 (S201), the wireless terminal checks whether its own device is specified in the first terminal information field, that is, whether its own identifier is set in the first terminal information field. (S202). If the own device is specified in the first terminal information field (YES), the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, etc. are confirmed, a request frame is generated, and the SIFS is received after the reception of the inquiry frame is completed. Later, a request frame is transmitted to the access point 11 (S203).
- the own device When the own device is not specified in the first terminal information field (NO in S202), it is checked whether the own device is specified in the second and subsequent terminal information fields (S204), and the second and subsequent terminal information fields. If specified in (YES), the reception of a polling frame is awaited. When a polling frame addressed to the own apparatus is received (S205), the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, and the like are confirmed, a request frame is generated, and the access point 11 is sent to the access point 11 after SIFS from completion of reception of the polling frame. A request frame is transmitted (S206). If the own device is not specified in the second and subsequent terminal information fields (NO in S204), it is determined that the device has been excluded from the candidates for the current UL-MU transmission, and the operation of this flow is terminated.
- the wireless terminal After transmitting the request frame in step S203 or step S206, the wireless terminal waits for the arrival of the notification frame from the access point 11 and receives the notification frame (S207). Then, the wireless terminal is designated as the UL-MU transmission target terminal. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S208). Specifically, it is confirmed whether the identifier of the own device is set in any of the terminal information fields in the notification frame. When the own device is designated (YES), the wireless terminal generates a data frame based on the parameter information designated in the terminal information field for the own device in the notification frame, and the data frame is changed to the notification frame. It transmits after a certain time such as SIFS from the completion of reception (S209).
- the access point when the access point receives a request frame requesting permission for data transmission from the wireless terminal (trigger terminal), the access point transmits an inquiry frame specifying one or more wireless terminals other than the trigger terminal. Transmit and collect request frames from the specified wireless terminal. Then, based on the request frame received from the trigger terminal and the designated wireless terminal, scheduling of UL-MU transmission (selection of a wireless terminal that performs UL-MU transmission, parameter information for transmission (data size for performing uplink transmission) And modulation / coding schemes). As a result, at least one wireless terminal having transmission data can be secured, and the request of each wireless terminal can be taken into account, thereby enabling efficient UL-MU transmission scheduling.
- the request frame is transmitted as a response to the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the head of the inquiry frame, the overhead can be reduced without transmitting the polling frame. . In this way, scheduling of uplink multiuser transmission can be performed efficiently with little overhead.
- the access point collects the request frames by sequentially transmitting the polling frames to the second and subsequent wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame.
- the access point collects the request frames by sequentially transmitting the polling frames to the second and subsequent wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame.
- a mode in which a request frame is acquired without performing the above is shown.
- FIG. 11 shows an example of an operation sequence according to the second embodiment.
- the access point 11 does not transmit the polling frame after transmitting the inquiry frame 22A.
- Each wireless terminal (wireless terminals 2, 3, 4 in the figure) designated by the inquiry frame 22A waits for the time designated by the inquiry frame 22A from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22A, respectively, and then receives the request frame 23, 24 and 27 are transmitted.
- the access point 11 instructs the wireless terminal 2 the timing after SIFS from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22A as the transmission timing of the request frame 23.
- the wireless terminal 3 is instructed as the transmission timing of the request frame 25 after the completion of the reception of the inquiry frame 22A, after a time obtained by adding twice the SIFS and the time length of the request frame 23.
- the transmission timing of the request frame 27 is the timing after the completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22 ⁇ / b> A after adding SIFS three times, the time length of the request frame 23, and the time length of the request frame 25. Instruct. Since the time lengths of the request frames 23, 25, and 27 are determined in advance and are the same length, the transmission timing can be designated in advance in this way.
- each wireless terminal As a specific method for specifying the transmission timing for each wireless terminal, information related to the standby time is set in the terminal information field for each wireless terminal, and each wireless terminal is specified by the information from the terminal information field of its own device.
- a method of waiting for a waiting time can be considered.
- the waiting time may be calculated on the terminal side according to the number of the terminal information field of the own device from the top.
- the time length of the request frame is fixed, and if the frame interval between the inquiry frame and the request frame and between the request frames is fixed to SIFS, the waiting time can also be calculated on the terminal side.
- SIFS SIFS
- the request frame transmitted by each wireless terminal may not be successfully received by the access point 11, but in this case, it may be handled that the request frame cannot be received from the wireless terminal. That is, the wireless terminal is excluded from the target terminals for the current UL-MU transmission.
- the present embodiment it is not necessary to transmit a polling frame after transmitting an inquiry frame. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment, from the execution decision of UL-MU transmission to the start of UL-MU transmission. The overhead can be further reduced.
- each wireless terminal is specified in each terminal information field in order to specify the wireless terminal to which the request frame is responded in the inquiry frame.
- the individual wireless terminal is specified. Instead of this, a method of designating a group of wireless terminals is also possible.
- the access point performs grouping in advance to generate one or a plurality of groups of wireless terminals.
- the grouping timing may be performed, for example, every time a new association process with a wireless terminal is performed, may be performed periodically, or may be performed at other timing. At this time, the same wireless terminal may be allowed to belong to a plurality of groups.
- the grouping method may be arbitrary. For example, when the propagation path response with each wireless terminal is grasped in advance, wireless terminals with small spatial correlation (small interference) may be grouped into the same group.
- the access point may notify grouping information representing the result of grouping to each wireless terminal that is the target of grouping using a management frame defined in advance.
- Fig. 12 shows an example of grouping information.
- the grouping information has a table format, but may have another format such as a list format.
- a group ID is assigned to each group, and an identifier of a wireless terminal belonging to each group is set in each row.
- wireless terminals 1 to 3 (STA1 to STA3) belong to a group having a group ID of 1.
- the grouping information notified to each wireless terminal may be information regarding all groups or only information regarding the group to which each wireless terminal belongs.
- the access point selects a target group from the group generated in advance. Then, the identifier (group ID) of the selected group is set in the group ID field of the inquiry frame.
- the terminal information field for each wireless terminal belonging to the group of the group ID may be omitted when there is no information to be notified individually to each wireless terminal.
- a target group it may be allowed that the wireless terminal 1 (trigger terminal) that transmitted the first request frame 21 belongs to the specified group. In this case, the wireless terminal 1 may operate so as not to perform anything on the access point 11 even when the inquiry frame 22 in which the group ID is set is received.
- the wireless terminal that directly responds to the inquiry frame is the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the predetermined position, specifically, the head terminal information field.
- a wireless terminal described at a predetermined position in the grouping information is a wireless terminal that directly responds to the inquiry frame.
- the wireless terminal described in the leftmost column of the table is a wireless terminal that responds to the inquiry frame.
- the priority is set so as to decrease from the left column to the right column of the table, and the wireless terminal with the highest priority responds to the inquiry frame.
- the wireless terminals described from the second column from the left to the right (second and subsequent priority wireless terminals) transmit a request frame according to the first or second embodiment. That is, in the case of conforming to the first embodiment, a request frame is transmitted as a response when a polling frame is received from an access point.
- a request frame is transmitted at the timing specified in the inquiry frame, or what number is listed from the leftmost column of the own device (what is the priority)
- the request frame is transmitted at a timing determined according to the above.
- the identifier of the trigger terminal is set in the inquiry frame, and the wireless terminal specified in the inquiry frame (belongs to the specified group) Terminals other than the trigger terminal among the terminals may determine the priority order of their own devices except for the trigger terminal.
- the identifier of the wireless terminal that directly responds may be set in the inquiry frame in addition to the group ID.
- a response terminal field for setting an identifier of a wireless terminal that directly responds may be defined in the inquiry frame.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of the group ID field and the response terminal field. These fields can be arranged in the data field of the MAC frame shown in FIG.
- the access point selects a wireless terminal (excluding the trigger terminal) that directly responds from the wireless terminals belonging to the selected group, and sets the group ID of the group and the identifier of the selected wireless terminal to the group ID of the inquiry frame. Set in the field and response terminal field.
- the wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame belongs to the group set in the group ID field and is specified in the response terminal field, the wireless terminal should return a request frame after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame. That's fine. If the own device belongs to the group set in the group ID field but is not specified in the response terminal field, the request frame may be transmitted in the same manner as the second and subsequent priority wireless terminals.
- the trigger terminal is allowed to belong to the specified group and the trigger terminal belongs, the above-described example may be followed.
- the length of the inquiry frame can be shortened by specifying the group ID instead of specifying the identifier of each wireless terminal in the inquiry frame.
- the access point may specify the notification frame to be transmitted to the wireless terminal selected as the UL-MU transmission target terminal by the group ID in the same manner.
- the access point selects a group that permits UL-MU transmission, and sets the identifier (group ID) of the selected group in the group ID field of the notification frame.
- group ID the identifier of the selected group in the group ID field of the notification frame.
- the access point acquires a request frame from each wireless terminal by central control type access control. That is, the access point controls to transmit a request frame to the target wireless terminal by transmitting an inquiry frame or a polling frame.
- this embodiment shows a mode in which each wireless terminal transmits a request frame in accordance with distributed control access control, specifically, CSMA / CA.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of an operation sequence according to the fourth embodiment.
- the access point transmits the inquiry frame 22 as in the first or second embodiment.
- the wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame 22 checks whether its own device is specified in the inquiry frame 22, and if so, transmits a request frame in accordance with CSMA / CA.
- the access point normally receives the request frame received from the wireless terminal, the access point returns an ACK frame after SIFS from completion of reception.
- the wireless terminals 2 to 4 are specified in the inquiry frame 22, the wireless terminal 2 first obtains the transmission right and transmits the request frame 23, and the access point receives it normally.
- ACK frame 41 is returned.
- the wireless terminal 3 acquires the transmission right, transmits the request frame 25, and the access point normally receives it and returns the ACK frame 42.
- the wireless terminal 4 transmits a request frame from the wireless terminal 4 and an ACK frame from the access point, which is not shown. Note that if the wireless terminal does not receive the ACK frame for the transmitted request frame, the wireless terminal may retransmit the request frame assuming that the transmission has failed.
- the subsequent operation changes depending on the position of the terminal information field specified in the inquiry frame 22 (particularly depending on whether it is the head or not). In this embodiment, each wireless terminal No matter what terminal information field the identifier is set, the operation is not affected.
- the access point returns an ACK frame in response to reception of the request frame, but transmission of the ACK frame may be omitted.
- An example of the operation sequence in this case is shown in FIG.
- the access point receives the request frames 23, 25, and 27 from the wireless terminals 2 to 4, but does not return an ACK frame. As a result, the reachability of the request frame transmitted by the wireless terminal cannot be guaranteed, but the recruitment period can be shortened.
- the access point may end the recruitment period (request frame collection processing) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
- Predetermined conditions include when a predetermined time has elapsed since the completion of transmission of the inquiry frame, or when request frames have been received from all wireless terminals specified in the inquiry frame.
- the predetermined number for example, there is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the desired multiplexing number or the maximum possible multiplexing number. The reason why 1 is subtracted is to exclude the trigger terminal.
- the access point selects a UL-MU transmission target terminal from the wireless terminals that transmitted the request frame, and transmits a notification frame 28 designating the selected wireless terminal.
- the load on the access point can be reduced, and the overhead until the UL-MU transmission start can be reduced.
- the wireless terminal specified by the inquiry frame transmits a request frame regardless of the presence / absence of uplink transmission data. That is, when there is no data for uplink transmission, it is assumed that a request frame with a data size of 0 or a transmission data presence / absence bit turned off is transmitted. The same applies to the first to third embodiments.
- the request frame is transmitted only when uplink transmission data is included.
- the access point generates and transmits an inquiry frame in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment.
- the wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame confirms whether its own device is designated by the inquiry frame, and when the own device is designated and has data for uplink transmission, the wireless terminal transmits the request frame according to CSMA / CA. Send. Even if the own device is specified, if there is no data for uplink transmission, the request frame is not transmitted.
- the access point terminates the recruitment period (request frame collection processing) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and selects the UL-MU transmission target from the wireless terminals that transmitted the request frame. Select a terminal.
- the access point generates a notification frame specifying the selected wireless terminal, and transmits the generated notification frame.
- the wireless terminal having data for uplink transmission returns the request frame in response to the inquiry frame, thereby improving the bandwidth usage efficiency and starting UL-MU transmission. Can be further reduced.
- the access point designates the wireless terminal that requests or permits transmission of the request frame in the inquiry frame, but designates all the wireless terminals that are already connected (wireless links have been established). It is also possible not to explicitly specify the wireless terminal.
- the terminal information field may be omitted from the inquiry frame. When there is information to be commonly notified to each wireless terminal, a common information field may be added to the inquiry frame, and information to be commonly notified to each wireless terminal may be set in the field.
- the access point generates and transmits an inquiry frame with a receiving address as a broadcast address or a multicast address. This inquiry frame may not have the terminal information field.
- the wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame confirms whether it has data for uplink transmission, and if it has data for uplink transmission, returns a request frame according to CSMA / CA. When there is no data for uplink transmission, the request frame may not be returned as in the fourth embodiment, or the request frame may be returned as in the third embodiment.
- the access point ends the recruitment period when the predetermined condition ends after the transmission of the inquiry frame is completed.
- the access point selects a terminal that is a target of UL-MU transmission from the wireless terminals (including the trigger terminal) that transmitted the request frame, and generates and transmits a notification frame.
- the frame length of the inquiry frame can be shortened.
- FIG. 21 shows an example of the overall configuration of a terminal (non-access point terminal) or access point.
- the terminal or access point includes one or more antennas 1 to n (n is an integer of 1 or more), a wireless LAN module 148, and a host system 149.
- the wireless LAN module 148 corresponds to the wireless communication device according to the first embodiment.
- the wireless LAN module 148 includes a host interface, and is connected to the host system 149 through the host interface. In addition to being connected to the host system 149 via a connection cable, the host system 149 may be directly connected.
- the wireless LAN module 148 is mounted on a substrate with solder or the like and is connected to the host system 149 through wiring on the substrate is also possible.
- the host system 149 communicates with an external device using the wireless LAN module 148 and the antennas 1 to n according to an arbitrary communication protocol.
- the communication protocol may include TCP / IP and higher layer protocols.
- TCP / IP may be installed in the wireless LAN module 148, and the host system 149 may execute only higher-layer protocols. In this case, the configuration of the host system 149 can be simplified.
- This terminal is, for example, a mobile terminal, TV, digital camera, wearable device, tablet, smartphone, game device, network storage device, monitor, digital audio player, web camera, video camera, project, navigation system, external adapter, internal It may be an adapter, set top box, gateway, printer server, mobile access point, router, enterprise / service provider access point, portable device, handheld device, and the like.
- FIG. 22 shows a hardware configuration example of the wireless LAN module.
- This configuration can also be applied when the wireless communication apparatus is mounted on either a non-access point terminal or an access point. That is, it can be applied as an example of a specific configuration of the wireless communication apparatus illustrated in FIG. In this configuration example, there is only one antenna, but two or more antennas may be provided. In this case, a plurality of sets of a transmission system (216, 222 to 225), a reception system (232 to 235), a PLL 242, a crystal oscillator (reference signal source) 243, and a switch 245 are arranged corresponding to each antenna. May be connected to the control circuit 212, respectively.
- the wireless LAN module (wireless communication device) includes a baseband IC (Integrated Circuit) 211, an RF (Radio Frequency) IC 221, a balun 225, a switch 245, and an antenna 247.
- a baseband IC Integrated Circuit
- RF Radio Frequency
- the baseband IC 211 includes a baseband circuit (control circuit) 212, a memory 213, a host interface 214, a CPU 215, a DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) 216, and an ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) 217.
- the baseband IC 211 and the RF IC 221 may be formed on the same substrate. Further, the baseband IC 211 and the RF IC 221 may be configured by one chip. Either or either of the DAC 216 and the ADC 217 may be arranged in the RF IC 221 or may be arranged in another IC. Further, both or either of the memory 213 and the CPU 215 may be arranged in an IC different from the baseband IC.
- the memory 213 stores data exchanged with the host system.
- the memory 213 stores information notified to the terminal or access point, information notified from the terminal or access point, or both.
- the memory 213 may store a program necessary for the execution of the CPU 215 and may be used as a work area when the CPU 215 executes the program.
- the memory 213 may be a volatile memory such as SRAM or DRAM, or a nonvolatile memory such as NAND or MRAM.
- the host interface 214 is an interface for connecting to the host system.
- the interface may be anything such as UART, SPI, SDIO, USB, and PCI Express.
- the CPU 215 is a processor that controls the baseband circuit 212 by executing a program.
- the baseband circuit 212 mainly performs MAC layer processing and physical layer processing.
- the baseband circuit 212, the CPU 215, or both of them correspond to a communication control device that controls communication or a control unit that controls communication.
- At least one of the baseband circuit 212 and the CPU 215 may include a clock generation unit that generates a clock, and the internal time may be managed by the clock generated by the clock generation unit.
- the baseband circuit 212 adds a physical header, encodes, encrypts, and modulates (may include MIMO modulation) as a physical layer process to a frame to be transmitted. For example, two types of digital baseband signals ( Hereinafter, a digital I signal and a digital Q signal) are generated.
- the DAC 216 performs DA conversion on the signal input from the baseband circuit 212. More specifically, the DAC 216 converts a digital I signal into an analog I signal and converts a digital Q signal into an analog Q signal. Note that there may be a case where the signal is transmitted as it is without a quadrature modulation. When a plurality of antennas are provided and transmission signals of one system or a plurality of systems are distributed and transmitted by the number of antennas, a number of DACs or the like corresponding to the number of antennas may be provided.
- the RF IC 221 is, for example, an RF analog IC, a high frequency IC, or both.
- the RF IC 221 includes a filter 222, a mixer 223, a preamplifier (PA) 224, a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) 242, a low noise amplifier (LNA), a balun 235, a mixer 233, and a filter 232. Some of these elements may be located on the baseband IC 211 or another IC.
- the filters 222 and 232 may be band pass filters or low pass filters.
- the filter 222 extracts a signal in a desired band from each of the analog I signal and the analog Q signal input from the DAC 216.
- the PLL 242 uses the oscillation signal input from the crystal oscillator 243 and divides and / or multiplies the oscillation signal to generate a signal having a constant frequency synchronized with the phase of the input signal.
- the PLL 242 includes a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator), and obtains a signal having the constant frequency by performing feedback control using the VCO based on an oscillation signal input from the crystal oscillator 243.
- the generated constant frequency signal is input to the mixer 223 and the mixer 233.
- the PLL 242 corresponds to an example of an oscillator that generates a signal having a constant frequency.
- the mixer 223 up-converts the analog I signal and the analog Q signal that have passed through the filter 222 to a radio frequency by using a constant frequency signal supplied from the PLL 242.
- the preamplifier (PA) amplifies the radio frequency analog I signal and analog Q signal generated by the mixer 223 to a desired output power.
- the balun 225 is a converter for converting a balanced signal (differential signal) into an unbalanced signal (single-ended signal).
- the RF IC 221 handles balanced signals, but since the unbalanced signal is handled from the output of the RF IC 221 to the antenna 247, these signals are converted by the balun 225.
- the switch 245 is connected to the balun 225 on the transmission side during transmission, and is connected to the low noise amplifier (LNA) 234 or RF IC 221 on the reception side during reception.
- the control of the switch 245 may be performed by the baseband IC 211 or the RF IC 221, or another circuit for controlling the switch 245 may exist and the switch 245 may be controlled from the circuit.
- the radio frequency analog I signal and analog Q signal amplified by the preamplifier 224 are balanced-unbalanced converted by the balun 225 and then radiated as radio waves from the antenna 247.
- the antenna 247 may be a chip antenna, an antenna formed by wiring on a printed board, or an antenna formed by using a linear conductor element.
- the LNA 234 in the RF IC 221 amplifies the signal received from the antenna 247 via the switch 245 to a level that can be demodulated while keeping the noise low.
- the balun 235 performs an unbalance-balance conversion on the signal amplified by the low noise amplifier (LNA) 234. A configuration in which the order of the balun 235 and the LNA 234 is reversed may be used.
- the mixer 233 down-converts the received signal converted into the balanced signal by the balun 235 into a baseband using a signal having a constant frequency input from the PLL 242.
- the mixer 233 has means for generating a carrier wave that is 90 ° out of phase based on a constant frequency signal input from the PLL 242, and the received signals converted by the balun 235 are each 90 ° Quadrature demodulation is performed using a carrier wave having a phase shift to generate an I (In-phase) signal having the same phase as the received signal and a Q (Quad-phase) signal that is 90 ° behind the signal.
- the filter 232 extracts a signal having a desired frequency component from these I signal and Q signal.
- the I signal and Q signal extracted by the filter 232 are output from the RF IC 221 after the gain is adjusted.
- the ADC 217 in the baseband IC 211 AD-converts the input signal from the RF IC 221. More specifically, the ADC 217 converts the I signal into a digital I signal and converts the Q signal into a digital Q signal. There may be a case where only one system signal is received without performing quadrature demodulation.
- the baseband circuit 212 When a plurality of antennas are provided, the number of ADCs corresponding to the number of antennas may be provided. Based on the digital I signal and the digital Q signal, the baseband circuit 212 performs physical layer processing (including MIMO demodulation) such as demodulation processing, error correction code processing, and physical header processing, and obtains a frame. The baseband circuit 212 performs MAC layer processing on the frame. Note that the baseband circuit 212 may be configured to perform TCP / IP processing when TCP / IP is implemented.
- physical layer processing including MIMO demodulation
- the baseband circuit 212 performs MAC layer processing on the frame. Note that the baseband circuit 212 may be configured to perform TCP / IP processing when TCP / IP is implemented.
- FIG. 18A and 18B are perspective views of wireless devices according to the eighth embodiment, respectively.
- the wireless device in FIG. 18A is a notebook PC 301
- the wireless device in FIG. 18B is a mobile terminal 321.
- Each corresponds to one form of a terminal (including an access point).
- the notebook PC 301 and the mobile terminal 321 are equipped with wireless communication devices 305 and 315, respectively.
- the wireless communication devices 305 and 315 a wireless communication device mounted on a terminal (including an access point) described so far can be used.
- a wireless device equipped with a wireless communication device is not limited to a notebook PC or a mobile terminal. For example, it can be mounted on a TV, a digital camera, a wearable device, a tablet, a smartphone, and the like.
- the wireless communication device mounted on the terminal can be mounted on the memory card.
- An example in which the wireless communication device is mounted on a memory card is shown in FIG.
- the memory card 331 includes a wireless communication device 355 and a memory card main body 332.
- the memory card 331 uses a wireless communication device 335 for wireless communication with an external device.
- description of other elements (for example, a memory) in the memory card 331 is omitted.
- a bus, a processor unit, and an external interface unit are provided.
- the processor unit and the external interface unit are connected to the buffer via the bus.
- Firmware operates in the processor unit. As described above, by configuring the firmware to be included in the wireless communication device, it is possible to easily change the function of the wireless communication device by rewriting the firmware.
- a clock generation unit In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a clock generation unit is provided.
- the clock generation unit generates a clock and outputs the clock from the output terminal to the outside of the wireless communication device.
- the host side and the wireless communication apparatus side can be operated in synchronization by outputting the clock generated inside the wireless communication apparatus to the outside and operating the host side with the clock output to the outside. It becomes possible.
- a power supply unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a power supply unit, a power supply control unit, and a wireless power supply unit are included.
- the power supply control unit is connected to the power supply unit and the wireless power supply unit, and performs control to select a power supply to be supplied to the wireless communication device. As described above, by providing the wireless communication apparatus with the power supply, it is possible to perform a low power consumption operation by controlling the power supply.
- a SIM card is included in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus described above.
- the SIM card is connected to, for example, a transmission unit, a reception unit, or a control unit in the wireless communication apparatus.
- authentication processing can be easily performed.
- the thirteenth embodiment includes a moving image compression / decompression unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment.
- the moving image compression / decompression unit is connected to the bus. As described above, by providing the wireless communication device with the moving image compression / decompression unit, it is possible to easily transmit the compressed moving image and expand the received compressed moving image.
- an LED unit is included.
- the LED unit is connected to the transmission unit, the reception unit, or the control unit. As described above, by providing the wireless communication device with the LED unit, it is possible to easily notify the user of the operation state of the wireless communication device.
- the fifteenth embodiment includes a vibrator unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment.
- the vibrator unit is connected to the transmission unit, the reception unit, or the control unit. As described above, by providing the radio communication device with the vibrator unit, it is possible to easily notify the user of the operation state of the radio communication device.
- a frame type in a wireless communication system [2] a method of disconnecting connections between wireless communication apparatuses, [3] an access method of a wireless LAN system, and [4] a frame interval of the wireless LAN will be described.
- [1] Frame Type in Communication System In general, frames handled on a radio access protocol in a radio communication system are roughly classified into three types: a data frame, a management frame, and a control frame. These types are usually indicated by a header portion provided in common between frames. As a display method of the frame type, three types may be distinguished by one field, or may be distinguished by a combination of two fields.
- the frame type is identified by two fields, Type and Subtype, in the Frame Control field in the frame header portion of the MAC frame.
- a data frame, a management frame, or a control frame is roughly classified in the Type field, and a detailed type in the roughly classified frame, for example, a Beacon frame in the management frame is identified in the Subtype field.
- the management frame is a frame used for managing a physical communication link with another wireless communication device. For example, there are a frame used for setting communication with another wireless communication device, a frame for releasing a communication link (that is, disconnecting), and a frame related to a power saving operation in the wireless communication device. .
- the data frame is a frame for transmitting data generated inside the wireless communication device to the other wireless communication device after establishing a physical communication link with the other wireless communication device.
- Data is generated in an upper layer of the present embodiment, for example, generated by a user operation.
- the control frame is a frame used for control when a data frame is transmitted / received (exchanged) to / from another wireless communication apparatus.
- the wireless communication apparatus receives a data frame or a management frame
- the response frame transmitted for confirmation of delivery belongs to the control frame.
- the response frame is, for example, an ACK frame or a BlockAck frame.
- RTS frames and CTS frames are also control frames.
- the association request frame and association response frame used in the process are management frames, and the association request. Since the frame and the Association Response frame are unicast management frames, the reception side wireless communication terminal is requested to transmit an ACK frame as a response frame, and the ACK frame is a control frame as described above.
- connection disconnection method between wireless communication devices There are an explicit method and an implicit method for disconnection (release) of a connection.
- an explicit method one of the wireless communication apparatuses that have established a connection transmits a frame for disconnection.
- a deauthentication frame is classified as a management frame. Normally, when a wireless communication device that transmits a frame for disconnecting a connection transmits the frame, the wireless communication device that receives a frame for disconnecting a connection disconnects the connection when the frame is received. judge. Then, if it is a non-access point wireless communication terminal, it returns to the initial state in the communication phase, for example, the state of searching for a connected BSS.
- the connection management Delete information related to the wireless communication terminal from the table. For example, when an AID is assigned at the stage where the wireless communication access point has permitted connection to each wireless communication terminal that joins its own BSS in the association process, the holding information associated with the AID of the wireless communication terminal that has disconnected the connection May be deleted, and the AID may be released and assigned to another newly joined wireless communication terminal.
- a frame transmission transmission of a data frame and a management frame, or transmission of a response frame to a frame transmitted by the device itself
- a wireless communication device of a connection partner with which a connection has been established. If not, it is determined whether the connection is disconnected.
- the connection is disconnected as described above, such that the communication distance is away from the connection-destination wireless communication device, and the wireless signal cannot be received or decoded. This is because a wireless link cannot be secured. That is, it is impossible to expect reception of a frame for disconnecting the connection.
- a timer is used as a specific example of determining disconnection by an implicit method. For example, when transmitting a data frame requesting a delivery confirmation response frame, a first timer (for example, a retransmission timer for a data frame) that limits a retransmission period of the frame is started, and until the first timer expires (that is, If a delivery confirmation response frame is not received (until the desired retransmission period elapses), retransmission is performed. The first timer is stopped when a delivery confirmation response frame to the frame is received.
- a first timer for example, a retransmission timer for a data frame
- the first timer is stopped when a delivery confirmation response frame to the frame is received.
- the first timer expires without receiving the delivery confirmation response frame, for example, it is confirmed whether the other party's wireless communication device still exists (within the communication range) (in other words, the wireless link can be secured).
- a second timer for limiting the retransmission period of the frame (for example, a retransmission timer for the management frame) is started at the same time. Similar to the first timer, the second timer also performs retransmission if it does not receive an acknowledgment frame for the frame until the second timer expires, and determines that the connection has been disconnected when the second timer expires. . When it is determined that the connection has been disconnected, a frame for disconnecting the connection may be transmitted.
- the third timer is started. Whenever a new frame is received from the connection partner wireless communication device, the third timer is stopped and restarted from the initial value. When the third timer expires, a management frame is transmitted to confirm whether the other party's wireless communication device still exists (within the communication range) (in other words, whether the wireless link has been secured) as described above. At the same time, a second timer (for example, a retransmission timer for management frames) that limits the retransmission period of the frame is started.
- a second timer for example, a retransmission timer for management frames
- the acknowledgment response frame to the frame is not received until the second timer expires, retransmission is performed, and if the second timer expires, it is determined that the connection has been disconnected.
- a frame for disconnecting the connection may be transmitted when it is determined that the connection has been disconnected.
- the latter management frame for confirming whether the wireless communication apparatus of the connection partner still exists may be different from the management frame in the former case.
- the timer for limiting the retransmission of the management frame is the same as that in the former case as the second timer, but a different timer may be used.
- [3] Access method of wireless LAN system For example, there is a wireless LAN system that is assumed to communicate or compete with a plurality of wireless communication devices.
- the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN uses CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Carrier Avoidance) as a basic access method.
- CSMA / CA Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Carrier Avoidance
- the transmission is performed simultaneously by a plurality of wireless communication devices grasping the transmission of the wireless communication device, and as a result
- the radio signal collides and frame transmission fails.
- the transmissions by a plurality of wireless communication devices that grasp the transmission of the wireless communication device are stochastically dispersed. Therefore, if there is one wireless communication device that has drawn the earliest time in the random time, the frame transmission of the wireless communication device is successful, and frame collision can be prevented. Since acquisition of transmission rights is fair among a plurality of wireless communication devices based on a random value, the method employing Carrier Aviation is a method suitable for sharing a wireless medium between a plurality of wireless communication devices. be able to.
- the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN frame interval will be described.
- the frame interval used in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN is as follows: distributed coordination function inter frame space (DIFS), arbitration inter frame space (AIFS), point coordination function intra interface space interface (IFS).
- DIFS distributed coordination function inter frame space
- AIFS arbitration inter frame space
- IFS point coordination function intra interface space interface
- RIFS reduced interface space
- the definition of the frame interval is defined as a continuous period to be opened after confirming the carrier sense idle before transmission in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN, and a strict period from the previous frame is not discussed. Therefore, in the description of the IEEE802.11 wireless LAN system here, the definition follows.
- the waiting time for random access based on CSMA / CA is the sum of a fixed time and a random time, and it can be said that such a definition is used to clarify the fixed time.
- DIFS and AIFS are frame intervals used when attempting to start frame exchange during a contention period competing with other wireless communication devices based on CSMA / CA.
- the DIFS is used when priority according to the traffic type (Traffic Identifier: TID) is provided when there is no distinction of the priority according to the traffic type.
- TID Traffic Identifier
- AIFS Since operations related to DIFS and AIFS are similar, the following description will be mainly made using AIFS.
- access control including the start of frame exchange is performed in the MAC layer.
- QoS Quality of Service
- the traffic type is notified together with the data, and the data is classified according to the priority at the time of access based on the traffic type.
- This class at the time of access is called an access category (AC). Therefore, an AIFS value is provided for each access category.
- PIFS is a frame interval for enabling access with priority over other competing wireless communication devices, and has a shorter period than either of the values of DIFS and AIFS.
- SIFS is a frame interval that can be used when transmitting a control frame of a response system or when frame exchange is continued in a burst after acquiring an access right once.
- the EIFS is a frame interval that is activated when frame reception fails (it is determined that the received frame is an error).
- the RIFS is a frame interval that can be used when a plurality of frames are continuously transmitted to the same wireless communication device in bursts after acquiring the access right once. Do not request a response frame.
- FIG. 20 shows an example of a frame exchange during a contention period based on random access in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN. *
- the random time is obtained by multiplying a pseudo-random integer derived from a uniform distribution between contention windows (Content Window: CW) given by an integer from 0 to a slot time.
- CW multiplied by slot time is referred to as CW time width.
- the initial value of CW is given by CWmin, and every time retransmission is performed, the value of CW is increased until it reaches CWmax.
- Both CWmin and CWmax have values for each access category, similar to AIFS.
- the wireless communication apparatus that is the transmission destination of W_DATA1 if the data frame is successfully received and the data frame is a frame that requests transmission of a response frame, the occupation of the physical packet that includes the data frame on the wireless medium is completed.
- a response frame (W_ACK1) is transmitted after SIFS from the time point.
- the wireless communication apparatus that has transmitted W_DATA1 transmits the next frame (for example, W_DATA2) after SIFS from the time when the physical packet containing W_ACK1 is occupied on the wireless medium if within the transmission burst time limit. be able to.
- AIFS, DIFS, PIFS, and EIFS are functions of SIFS and slot time, and SIFS and slot time are defined for each physical layer.
- Parameters for which values are provided for each access category, such as AIFS, CWmin, and CWmax, can be set for each communication group (Basic Service Set (BSS) in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN), but default values are set. .
- BSS Base Service Set
- the SIFS is 16 ⁇ s and the slot time is 9 ⁇ s.
- the PIFS is 25 ⁇ s
- the DIFS is 34 ⁇ s
- the frame interval of the access category BACKGROUND (AC_BK) in AIFS is 79 ⁇ s by default.
- the frame interval of BEST EFFORT (AC_BE) has a default value of 43 ⁇ s
- the frame interval of VIDEO (AC_VI) and VOICE (AC_VO) has a default value of 34 ⁇ s
- the default values of CWmin and CWmax are 31 and 1023 for AC_BK and AC_BE, respectively.
- AC_VI is 15 and 31
- AC_VO is 7 and 15.
- the EIFS is basically the sum of the time lengths of response frames in the case of transmission at SIFS and DIFS at the slowest required physical rate.
- the occupation time length of a physical packet carrying a response frame to a physical packet that has activated EIFS is estimated, and the sum of SIFS, DIFS, and the estimated time may be used. it can.
- a wireless communication system using such a frame interval parameter is assumed as an interference system having a wide communication range.
- the frame described in each embodiment may refer to what is called a packet in the IEEE 802.11 standard or a compliant standard such as Null Data Packet.
- frames transmitted by a plurality of terminals may have different contents or the same contents.
- a general expression when it is expressed that a plurality of terminals transmit or receive the Xth frame, the contents of these Xth frames may be the same or different.
- X is an arbitrary value.
- the terminal transmits a plurality of Xth frames (in time series) the contents of these Xth frames may be the same or different.
- X is an arbitrary value.
- processors may include general purpose processors, central processing units (CPUs), microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), controllers, microcontrollers, state machines, and the like.
- processors may refer to an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array (FPGA), a programmable logic circuit (PLD), or the like.
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- PLD programmable logic circuit
- processor may refer to a combination of processing devices such as a plurality of microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and one or more microprocessors that cooperate with a DSP core.
- the term “memory” may encompass any electronic component capable of storing electronic information.
- “Memory” means random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), programmable read only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable PROM (EEPROM), non-volatile It may refer to random access memory (NVRAM), flash memory, magnetic or optical data storage, which can be read by the processor. If the processor reads and / or writes information to the memory, the memory can be said to be in electrical communication with the processor. The memory may be integrated into the processor, which again can be said to be in electrical communication with the processor.
- the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as it is, and can be embodied by modifying constituent elements without departing from the scope of the invention in the implementation stage.
- various inventions can be formed by appropriately combining a plurality of components disclosed in the embodiment. For example, some components may be deleted from all the components shown in the embodiment.
- constituent elements over different embodiments may be appropriately combined.
- Access point (wireless terminal) 12A, 12B, 12C, 12D antennas 1, 2, 3, 4: wireless terminals 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A: antennas 21, 23, 25, 27: request frames 22, 22A: inquiry frames 28: notification frames 29 to 32: Data frame 33: BlockACK frame 101, 201: Control unit 102, 202: Transmission unit 103, 203: Reception unit 104, 204: Buffer 111, 211: Baseband unit 121, 221: RF unit 122, 222: Transmission circuit 123, 223: reception circuit 112, 212: control circuit 113, 213: transmission processing circuit 114, 214: reception processing circuit 115, 116, 215, 216: DA conversion circuit 117, 118, 217, 218: AD conversion circuit 301: Notebook PC 305, 315, 355: Wireless communication device 321: Mobile terminal 331: Memory card 332: Memory card body
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
- Communication Control (AREA)
Abstract
[Problem] To efficiently schedule uplink multi-user transmission. [Solution] A wireless communication terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention is equipped with at least one antenna, a wireless communication unit for transmitting and receiving frames through the antenna, and a control unit. Therein, the control unit: receives a first frame requesting transmission permission via the wireless communication unit; according to receipt of the first frame, transmits, via the wireless communication unit, a second frame asking whether there is a transmission request in a second terminal differing from the first terminal which transmitted the first frame; receives a third frame reporting whether the transmission request is present via the wireless communication unit; on the basis of the first and third frames, transmits, via the wireless communication unit, a fourth frame specifying a third terminal permitting transmission; and after completing transmission of the fourth frame, receives a fifth frame via the wireless communication unit.
Description
本発明の実施形態は、無線通信端末、無線通信方法および無線通信システムに関する。
Embodiments described herein relate generally to a wireless communication terminal, a wireless communication method, and a wireless communication system.
無線LANシステムにおいて、複数の無線端末がアップリンクで同時送信を行う方式をサポートするためのプロトコルが検討されている。アップリンクで複数の無線端末が同時送信を行う方式としては、アップリンクマルチユーザMIMO(Uplink Multi-User MIMO:UL-MU-MIMO)送信、およびアップリンクマルチユーザマルチチャネル(Uplink Multi-User Multi-Channel)送信が知られている。以下、これらの方式を総称して、アップリンクマルチユーザ(UL-MU)送信と呼ぶことがある。UL-MU送信を発動するためのトリガとして、アクセスポイントがトリガを発生させる中央制御型方式と、無線端末がトリガを発生させる分散制御型方式が提案されている。
In a wireless LAN system, a protocol for supporting a method in which a plurality of wireless terminals perform simultaneous transmission on the uplink is being studied. As a method in which a plurality of wireless terminals simultaneously transmit in the uplink, uplink multi-user MIMO (Uplink Multi-User MIMO: UL-MU-MIMO) transmission and uplink multi-user multi-channel (Uplink Multi-User Multi-Multi) are available. (Channel) transmission is known. Hereinafter, these methods may be collectively referred to as uplink multi-user (UL-MU) transmission. As triggers for invoking UL-MU transmission, a central control type where an access point generates a trigger and a distributed control type where a wireless terminal generates a trigger have been proposed.
中央制御型方式では、アクセスポイントがUL-MU送信の開始前に募集期間を設け、UL-MU送信の実行を希望する無線端末は、この募集期間にアクセスポイントにUL-MU送信に必要な情報を通知する。この方法では、UL-MU送信開始前までのオーバーヘッドが大きくなるとともに、募集期間内に無線端末からのUL-MU送信の希望通知が来ない可能性もある。この場合、システム効率の低下を招く。また、UL-MU送信の実行を希望する無線端末が存在するのか未知のため、UL-MU送信の実行を決定するタイミングも難しい。
In the central control method, an access point provides a solicitation period before the start of UL-MU transmission, and a wireless terminal desiring to execute UL-MU transmission can send information necessary for UL-MU transmission to the access point during this solicitation period. To be notified. In this method, overhead before the start of UL-MU transmission increases, and there is a possibility that a notification of hope for UL-MU transmission from the wireless terminal does not come within the recruitment period. In this case, system efficiency is reduced. In addition, since it is unknown whether there is a wireless terminal that desires to execute UL-MU transmission, it is difficult to determine the timing for executing UL-MU transmission.
分散制御型方式では、アクセスポイントが、ある無線端末からアップリンク送信要求を受けると、当該無線端末が属するグループのグループIDを含むフレームをトリガフレームとしてブロードキャストすることで、当該グループに含まれる無線端末(IEEE802.11acでは最大4端末)にUL-MU送信を行わせる。中央制御型方式に比べて、UL-MU送信開始前までのオーバーヘッドは大幅低減できるが、アクセスポイントは、最初にアップリンク送信要求を行った無線端末以外の無線端末の要求を収集しないため、最初にアップリンク送信要求を行った無線端末の要求に合わせて、他無線端末もアップリンク送信を行う必要がある。この場合、他無線端末にとっては効率の良くないデータ送信となる可能性がある。
In the distributed control method, when an access point receives an uplink transmission request from a certain wireless terminal, a wireless terminal included in the group is broadcast by broadcasting a frame including a group ID of the group to which the wireless terminal belongs as a trigger frame. (Up to 4 terminals in IEEE 802.11ac) UL-MU transmission is performed. Compared to the central control method, overhead before the start of UL-MU transmission can be greatly reduced. However, since the access point does not collect requests from wireless terminals other than the wireless terminal that initially made the uplink transmission request, In response to the request from the wireless terminal that made the uplink transmission request, other wireless terminals need to perform uplink transmission. In this case, the data transmission may not be efficient for other wireless terminals.
このように中央制御型および分散制御型のいずれでも、少ないオーバーヘッドでアップリンクマルチユーザ送信のスケジューリングを効率的に行うことはできなかった。
As described above, neither the central control type nor the distributed control type can efficiently perform uplink multiuser transmission scheduling with a small overhead.
本発明の実施形態は、アップリンクマルチユーザ送信のスケジューリングを効率的に行うことを目的とする。
An embodiment of the present invention aims to efficiently schedule uplink multiuser transmission.
本発明の実施形態としての無線通信端末は、少なくとも1つのアンテナと、前記アンテナを介して、フレームを送受信する無線通信部と、制御部とを備える。前記制御部は、前記無線通信部を介して、送信の許可を要求する第1フレームを受信し、前記第1フレームの受信に応じて、前記無線通信部を介して、前記第1フレームを送信した第1端末と異なる第2端末にz延期送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第2フレームを送信し、前記無線通信部を介して、前記送信の要求の有無を通知する第3フレームを受信し、前記第1フレームと前記第3フレームに基づいて、前記無線通信部を介して、前記送信を許可する第3端末を指定した第4フレームを送信し、前記第4フレームの送信完了後に、前記無線通信部を介して、第5フレームを受信する。
A wireless communication terminal as an embodiment of the present invention includes at least one antenna, a wireless communication unit that transmits and receives a frame via the antenna, and a control unit. The control unit receives a first frame requesting permission for transmission via the wireless communication unit, and transmits the first frame via the wireless communication unit in response to reception of the first frame. A second frame for inquiring whether there is a request for z-delayed transmission to a second terminal different from the first terminal, and receiving a third frame for notifying whether there is a request for transmission via the wireless communication unit, Based on the first frame and the third frame, a fourth frame designating the third terminal permitted to transmit is transmitted via the wireless communication unit, and after the transmission of the fourth frame is completed, the wireless The fifth frame is received via the communication unit.
以下、図面を参照しながら、本発明の実施形態について、説明する。無線LANの規格して知られているIEEE Std 802.11TM-2012およびIEEE Std 802.11acTM-2013は、本明細書においてその全てが参照によって組み込まれる(incorporated by reference)ものとする。
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. IEEE Std 802.11TM-2012 and IEEE Std 802.11acTM-2013, which are known as wireless LAN standards, are all incorporated herein by reference (incorporated by reference).
以下、図面を参照しながら、本発明の実施形態について説明する。
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
(第1の実施形態)
図1は、第1の実施形態に係る無線通信システムを示す。 (First embodiment)
FIG. 1 shows a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment.
図1は、第1の実施形態に係る無線通信システムを示す。 (First embodiment)
FIG. 1 shows a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment.
図1の無線通信システムは、アクセスポイント(Access Point:AP)11と、複数の無線端末1、2、3、4とを具備した無線ネットワークである。アクセスポイント11も、無線端末の一形態であるが、中継機能を有する点において、無線端末1~4と異なる。アクセスポイント11と各無線端末1~4は、任意の無線規格に従って通信を行う。ここでは、IEEE802.11規格に従うものとする。IEEE802.11規格では、アクセス制御方式として、CSMA/CA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance)が用いられる。無線端末1~4が、アクセスポイント11が形成するネットワーク(BSS:Basic Service Set)に属するためには、アクセスポイント11とアソシエーション処理、および必要に応じて認証処理を行って、無線リンクを確立する必要がある。無線端末1~4がアクセスポイント11と無線リンクを確立することで、通信に必要なパラメータの交換や互いの能力の把握を行う。
The wireless communication system in FIG. 1 is a wireless network including an access point (AP) 11 and a plurality of wireless terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4. The access point 11 is also a form of a wireless terminal, but differs from the wireless terminals 1 to 4 in having a relay function. The access point 11 and each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 communicate according to an arbitrary wireless standard. Here, it shall conform to the IEEE 802.11 standard. In the IEEE 802.11 standard, CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Avidance) is used as an access control method. In order for the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to belong to the network (BSS: Basic Service Set) formed by the access point 11, the wireless terminal 1 establishes a wireless link by performing an association process with the access point 11 and an authentication process as necessary. There is a need. The wireless terminals 1 to 4 establish a wireless link with the access point 11 to exchange parameters necessary for communication and grasp each other's capabilities.
アクセスポイント11は、複数のアンテナを備え、図1の例では、4つのアンテナ12A、12B、12C、12Dを備える。アクセスポイント11は、無線端末1~4と無線通信するための装置(無線通信装置)を搭載する。装置(無線通信装置)は、無線端末1~4と信号を送受信する無線通信部またはRF集積回路と、無線通信部を介して無線端末1~4とフレームを送受信することで、複数の無線端末1~4との通信を制御する制御部またはベースバンド集積回路とを備える。
The access point 11 includes a plurality of antennas. In the example of FIG. 1, the access point 11 includes four antennas 12A, 12B, 12C, and 12D. The access point 11 is equipped with a device (wireless communication device) for wireless communication with the wireless terminals 1 to 4. The device (wireless communication device) includes a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated circuit that transmits and receives signals to and from wireless terminals 1 to 4, and a plurality of wireless terminals by transmitting and receiving frames to and from wireless terminals 1 to 4 via the wireless communication unit. And a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit for controlling communication with 1 to 4.
各無線端末1~4は、1つまたは複数のアンテナを備え、図1の例では、各無線端末1~4は、それぞれ1本のアンテナ1A、2A、3A、4Aを備える。各無線端末は、アクセスポイント11と無線通信するための装置(無線通信装置)を搭載する。装置(無線通信装置)は、アクセスポイント11と信号を送受信する無線通信部またはRF集積回路と、無線通信部を介してアクセスポイント11とフレームを送受信することで、アクセスポイント11との通信を制御する制御部またはベースバンド集積回路とを備える。
Each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 includes one or a plurality of antennas, and in the example of FIG. 1, each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 includes one antenna 1A, 2A, 3A, and 4A. Each wireless terminal is equipped with a device (wireless communication device) for wireless communication with the access point 11. The device (wireless communication device) controls communication with the access point 11 by transmitting / receiving a frame to / from the access point 11 via a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated circuit that transmits / receives a signal to / from the access point 11. A control unit or a baseband integrated circuit.
アクセスポイント11は、無線ネットワーク(第1ネットワークと呼ぶ)を形成し、アクセスポイント11と通信する無線端末は、この無線ネットワークに属する必要がある。アクセスポイント11は、この無線ネットワークとは別の、有線または無線の他のネットワーク(第2ネットワークと呼ぶ)に接続されてもよい。アクセスポイント11は、これら第1ネットワークおよび第2ネットワーク間の通信を中継したり、第1ネットワークに属する複数の無線端末間での通信を中継したりする。アクセスポイント11は、各無線端末1~4から受信したデータフレームを、その宛先に応じて、同じ第1ネットワークの他に無線端末に送信したり、第1ネットワークとは別の第2ネットワークに転送したりする。
The access point 11 forms a wireless network (referred to as a first network), and a wireless terminal that communicates with the access point 11 needs to belong to this wireless network. The access point 11 may be connected to another wired or wireless network (referred to as a second network) different from the wireless network. The access point 11 relays communication between the first network and the second network, or relays communication between a plurality of wireless terminals belonging to the first network. The access point 11 transmits the data frame received from each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to the wireless terminal in addition to the same first network or transfers it to a second network different from the first network, depending on the destination. To do.
本実施形態では、複数の無線端末は、自装置で発生したデータを含むデータフレームをアクセスポイント11に送信する際、アップリンクマルチユーザ(Uplink Multi-User)方式で送信することを可能としている。アップリンクマルチユーザ方式として、アップリンクマルチユーザMIMO(Uplink Multi-User MIMO:UL-MU-MIMO)と、またはアップリンクの直交周波数分割多元接続(UL-OFDMA:Uplink Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access)がある。UL-OFDMAには、リソースユニットベースのUL-OFDMAと、チャネルベースのUL-OFDMAがある。後者は、アップリンクマルチユーザマルチチャネル(Uplink Multi-User Multi-Channel:UL-MU-MC)と呼ばれることもある。本実施形態で行うUL-MU送信は、これらのいずれの方式の送信でも構わない。
In the present embodiment, when a plurality of wireless terminals transmit a data frame including data generated in its own device to the access point 11, it is possible to transmit the data frame using an uplink multi-user (Uplink Multi-User) method. Uplink multi-user schemes include uplink multi-user MIMO (Uplink Multi-User MIMO: UL-MU-MIMO) or uplink orthogonal frequency division multiple access (UL-OFDMA: Uplink Orthogonal Division Multiple Access). . UL-OFDMA includes resource unit-based UL-OFDMA and channel-based UL-OFDMA. The latter is sometimes referred to as uplink multi-user multi-channel (UL-MU-MC). The UL-MU transmission performed in this embodiment may be any of these schemes.
図2(A)にUL-MU-MIMO送信の概要を示す。複数の無線端末1~4(STA1~STA4)が、アクセスポイント(AP)に、同一周波数帯域(図ではチャネル1)で同時にフレームを送信する。アクセスポイントが、これらのフレームを同時に受信し、MIMO復調することで、各無線端末のフレームに分離する。UL-MU-MIMO送信では、同時に複数の無線端末からフレームを送信できるため、システムスループットを向上させることができる。UL-MU-MIMO送信の最大の多重可能なデータストリームの数は、アクセスポイントのアンテナ数によって制限される。図1の例の場合、アクセスポイント11が4つのアンテナを有するため、最大多重可能ストリーム数は4である。各無線端末が1つのアンテナを備え、それぞれ1データストリームのみを送信可能な場合、アクセスポイントが同時に通信可能な端末は、最大で4台である。ある1台の無線端末が、複数のアンテナを備えて、複数データストリームの送信(MIMO送信)を行うことも可能である。
Fig. 2 (A) shows the outline of UL-MU-MIMO transmission. A plurality of wireless terminals 1 to 4 (STA1 to STA4) simultaneously transmit frames to the access point (AP) in the same frequency band (channel 1 in the figure). The access point receives these frames at the same time and separates them into frames of each wireless terminal by performing MIMO demodulation. In UL-MU-MIMO transmission, frames can be transmitted simultaneously from a plurality of wireless terminals, so that system throughput can be improved. The maximum number of data streams that can be multiplexed for UL-MU-MIMO transmission is limited by the number of antennas at the access point. In the case of the example in FIG. 1, since the access point 11 has four antennas, the maximum number of streams that can be multiplexed is four. When each wireless terminal has one antenna and can transmit only one data stream, each access point can simultaneously communicate with up to four terminals. A single wireless terminal can be equipped with a plurality of antennas to transmit a plurality of data streams (MIMO transmission).
図2(B)にUL-MU-MC送信の概要を示す。アクセスポイント(AP)が、複数のチャネル1~4を、複数の無線端末1~4(STA1~4)にそれぞれ割り当て、複数の無線端末1~4からそれぞれの割り当てチャネルで同時に送信する。すなわち、無線端末1~4がそれぞれチャネル1~4を用いて、OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access)送信を行う。各無線端末に割り当てるチャネルは、互いに異なるチャネルである。OFDMA送信で利用する複数のチャネルは、無線通信システムとして利用する全てのチャネルであっても、その一部の複数チャネルであってもよい。各無線端末に割り当てるチャネルは1つでもよいし、複数でもよい。複数のチャネルを割り当てる場合、割り当てるチャネルは、周波数領域で連続するチャネルであっても、分離した位置のチャネルでもよい。仮に、8つの割り当て可能なチャネルが存在し、1台の無線端末につき1つのチャネルを割り当てる場合は、同時に通信可能な端末数は、最大で8である。アクセスポイントは、各無線端末から同時に受信したフレームから無線端末ごとのチャネルの信号をフィルタリング等で抽出して、抽出した信号を復調および復号等を含む物理層の処理を行うことで、各無線端末が送信したフレームを取得する。
Figure 2 (B) shows an overview of UL-MU-MC transmission. An access point (AP) assigns a plurality of channels 1 to 4 to a plurality of wireless terminals 1 to 4 (STA1 to 4), respectively, and simultaneously transmits from the plurality of wireless terminals 1 to 4 on the assigned channels. That is, wireless terminals 1 to 4 perform OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) transmission using channels 1 to 4, respectively. The channels assigned to each wireless terminal are different from each other. The plurality of channels used in OFDMA transmission may be all channels used as a wireless communication system or some of the channels. One or more channels may be allocated to each wireless terminal. When a plurality of channels are allocated, the allocated channels may be channels that are continuous in the frequency domain or channels that are separated from each other. If eight channels that can be allocated exist and one channel is allocated to one wireless terminal, the maximum number of terminals that can communicate simultaneously is eight. The access point extracts a channel signal for each wireless terminal from a frame received simultaneously from each wireless terminal by filtering or the like, and performs processing of the physical layer including demodulation and decoding on the extracted signal to each wireless terminal. Get the frame sent by.
一方、リソースユニットベースのOFDMAでは、1つまたは複数のサブキャリアを含むリソースユニット(サブチャネル、リソースブロック、周波数ブロックなどと呼んでもよい)を、通信リソースとして端末に割り当て、リソースユニットベースで、複数の端末と同時に通信する。
On the other hand, in resource unit based OFDMA, resource units (which may be called subchannels, resource blocks, frequency blocks, etc.) including one or a plurality of subcarriers are allocated to terminals as communication resources, Communicate simultaneously with other terminals.
リソースユニットは、通信を行うリソースの最小単位となる周波数成分である。図21に、1つのチャネル(ここではチャネルMと記述している)内の連続した周波数領域に確保したリソースユニット(RU#1、RU#2、・・・RU#K)を示す。チャネルMには、互いに直交する複数のサブキャリアが配置されており、1つまたは複数のサブキャリアを含む複数のリソースユニットがチャネルM内に定義されている。リソースユニット間には、1つ以上のサブキャリア(ガードサブキャリア)が配置されてもよいが、ガードサブキャリアは必須ではない。チャネル内の各リソースユニットまたは各サブキャリアは、リソースユニットまたはサブキャリアを識別するための識別情報が設定されていてもよい。1つのチャネルの帯域幅は、一例として、20MHz、40MHz、80MHz、160MHzなどであるが、これらに限定されない。20MHzの複数のチャネルをまとめて1つのチャネルとしてもよい。帯域幅に応じてチャネル内のサブキャリア数またはリソースユニット数が異なってもよい。複数の端末がそれぞれ異なるリソースユニットを同時に用いることで、OFDMA通信が実現される。
Resource unit is a frequency component that is the minimum unit of resources for communication. FIG. 21 shows resource units (RU # 1, RU # 2,... RU # K) secured in a continuous frequency region in one channel (denoted as channel M here). A plurality of subcarriers orthogonal to each other are arranged in channel M, and a plurality of resource units including one or more subcarriers are defined in channel M. One or more subcarriers (guard subcarriers) may be arranged between resource units, but guard subcarriers are not essential. Each resource unit or each subcarrier in the channel may be set with identification information for identifying the resource unit or subcarrier. The bandwidth of one channel is, for example, 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, but is not limited thereto. A plurality of 20 MHz channels may be combined into one channel. Depending on the bandwidth, the number of subcarriers or resource units in the channel may be different. Multiple terminals simultaneously use different resource units, thereby realizing OFDMA communication.
リソースユニットの帯域幅(あるいはサブキャリア数)は、各リソースユニットで共通でもよいし、リソースユニットごとに帯域幅(あるいはサブキャリア数)が異なってもよい。図22に、1つのチャネル内におけるリソースユニットの配置パターン例を模式的に示す。紙面に沿って横方向が周波数領域方向に対応する。図22(A)は、同じ帯域幅の複数のリソースユニット(RU#1、RU#2、・・・RU#K)を配置した例を示す。図22(B)は、図22(A)より大きな帯域幅の複数のリソースユニット(RU#11-1、RU#11-2、・・・、RU#11-L)を配置した例を示す。図22(C)は3種類以上の帯域幅のリソースユニットを配置した例を示す。リソースユニット(RU#12-1、RU#12-2)が最も大きな帯域幅を有し、リソースユニットRU#11-(L-1)は図22(B)のリソースユニットと同じ帯域幅、リソースユニット(RU#K-1、RU#K)は図22(A)のリソースユニットと同じ帯域幅である。
The bandwidth (or the number of subcarriers) of the resource unit may be common to each resource unit, or the bandwidth (or the number of subcarriers) may be different for each resource unit. FIG. 22 schematically shows an example of an arrangement pattern of resource units in one channel. The horizontal direction along the plane of the paper corresponds to the frequency domain direction. FIG. 22A shows an example in which a plurality of resource units (RU # 1, RU # 2,... RU # K) having the same bandwidth are arranged. FIG. 22B shows an example in which a plurality of resource units (RU # 11-1, RU # 11-2,..., RU # 11-L) having a larger bandwidth than that in FIG. . FIG. 22C shows an example in which resource units having three or more bandwidths are arranged. The resource units (RU # 12-1, RU # 12-2) have the largest bandwidth, and the resource unit RU # 11- (L-1) has the same bandwidth and resources as the resource unit of FIG. The units (RU # K-1, RU # K) have the same bandwidth as the resource unit in FIG.
各端末がOFDMAで使用するリソースユニット数は、1つまたは複数であり、特定の値に制限されない。端末が複数のリソースユニットを用いる場合、周波数的に連続する複数のリソースユニットをボンディングして1つのリソースユニットとして用いてもよいし、離れた箇所にある複数のリソースユニットを用いることを許容してもよい。図22(B)のリソースユニット#11-1は、図22(A)のリソースユニット#1と#2をボンディングしたリソースユニットの一例と考えても良い。
The number of resource units that each terminal uses in OFDMA is one or more, and is not limited to a specific value. When a terminal uses a plurality of resource units, a plurality of resource units that are continuous in frequency may be bonded to be used as one resource unit, or a plurality of resource units in remote locations may be used. Also good. Resource unit # 11-1 in FIG. 22B may be considered as an example of a resource unit in which resource units # 1 and # 2 in FIG.
1つのリソースユニット内のサブキャリアは周波数領域で連続していてもよいし、非連続に配置された複数のサブキャリアからリソースユニットを定義してもよい。OFDMAで使用するチャネルは1つに限定されず、チャネルMに加えて、周波数領域で離れた位置に配置された別のチャネル(図21のチャネルNを参照)内にも、チャネルMと同様にしてリソースユニットを確保し、チャネルMとチャネルNの両方内のリソースユニットを用いてもよい。チャネルMとチャネルNとでリソースユニットの配置方法は同じであっても、異なってもよい。1つのチャネルの帯域幅は、一例として、上述のように、20MHz、40MHz、80MHz、160MHzなどであるが、これらに限定されない。3つ以上のチャネルを用いることも可能である。なお、チャネルMとチャネルNをまとめて1つのチャネルとして考えることも可能である。
サ ブ Subcarriers in one resource unit may be continuous in the frequency domain, or a resource unit may be defined from a plurality of subcarriers arranged discontinuously. The number of channels used in OFDMA is not limited to one. In addition to channel M, another channel (see channel N in FIG. 21) arranged at a position distant from the frequency domain may be used in the same manner as channel M. Resource units may be secured and resource units in both channel M and channel N may be used. The channel M and channel N may have the same or different resource unit arrangement method. As an example, the bandwidth of one channel is 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, or the like as described above, but is not limited thereto. It is possible to use more than two channels. It is also possible to consider channel M and channel N as one channel.
なお、OFDMAを実施する端末は、少なくとも後方互換の対象となるレガシー端末での基本チャネル幅(IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac規格対応端末をレガシー端末とするなら20MHzチャネル幅)のチャネルで、フレームを含む物理パケットを受信および復号(復調および誤り訂正符号の復号等を含む)できるものとする。キャリアセンスに関しては、基本チャネル幅の単位で行うものとする。
A terminal that implements OFDMA has at least a channel with a basic channel width (20 MHz channel width if a terminal that supports IEEE802.11a / b / g / n / ac standard is a legacy terminal) of a legacy terminal that is subject to backward compatibility. It is assumed that a physical packet including a frame can be received and decoded (including demodulation and decoding of an error correction code). Carrier sense is performed in units of basic channel width.
キャリアセンスは、CCA(Clear Channel Assessment)のビジー/アイドルに関する物理的なキャリアセンス(Physical Carrier Sense)と、受信したフレームの中に記載されている媒体予約時間に基づく仮想的なキャリアセンス(Virtual Carrier Sense)との両方を包含してもよい。後者のように、仮想的に媒体をビジーであると判定する仕組み、或いは、仮想的に媒体をビジーであるとする期間は、NAV(Network Allocation Vector)と呼ばれる。なお、チャネル単位で行ったCCAまたはNAVに基づくキャリアセンス情報は、チャネル内の全リソースユニットに共通に適用してもよい。例えばキャリアセンス情報がアイドルを示すチャネルに属するリソースユニットは、すべてアイドルと判断してもよい。
The carrier sense includes CCA (Clear Channel Asset) busy / idle physical carrier sense (Physical Carrier Sense) and virtual carrier sense based on the media reservation time described in the received frame (Virtual Carrier Sense). Sense) may be included. A mechanism for virtually determining that a medium is busy, such as the latter, or a period during which a medium is virtually busy is referred to as NAV (Network Allocation Vector). Note that the carrier sense information based on CCA or NAV performed for each channel may be commonly applied to all resource units in the channel. For example, all resource units belonging to a channel whose carrier sense information indicates idle may be determined as idle.
なお、アップリンクのマルチユーザ通信として、UL-MU-MIMOとUL-OFDMAを組み合わせた方式(UL-MU-MIMO&OFDMA)を実行してもよい。UL-OFDMA&MU-MIMOは、リソースユニットまたはチャネル毎に、複数の端末間で同じリソースユニットまたはチャネルを利用して、MU-MIMO送信を行うことになる。
It should be noted that a scheme combining UL-MU-MIMO and UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MIMO & OFDMA) may be executed as uplink multi-user communication. UL-OFDMA & MU-MIMO performs MU-MIMO transmission for each resource unit or channel by using the same resource unit or channel between a plurality of terminals.
上述したように、アクセスポイント11と無線端末1~4は、無線リンクを確立することで、通信に必要なパラメータの交換や互いの能力の把握を行う。よって、アクセスポイント11は、無線端末1~4と無線リンクを確立することで、無線端末1~4が、UL-MU-MIMO送信またはUL-OFDMA(チャネルベースのUL-OFDMA(UL-MU-MC)またはリソースユニットベースUL-OFDMA)送信に対応した無線端末が否か等も把握できる。ただし、UL-MU-MIMO送信またはUL-MU-MC(チャネルベースのUL-OFDMA(UL-MU-MC)またはリソースユニットベースUL-OFDMA)送信への対応可否の能力の把握は、無線リンクの確立後に、管理フレーム等の送受信により把握することも可能である。なお、図1では、無線端末1~4が示されるが、図示の無線端末1~4以外にも、アクセスポイント11と無線リンクを確立した他の無線端末が存在してもよい。
As described above, the access point 11 and the wireless terminals 1 to 4 establish wireless links to exchange parameters necessary for communication and grasp each other's capabilities. Therefore, the access point 11 establishes a wireless link with the wireless terminals 1 to 4 so that the wireless terminals 1 to 4 can perform UL-MU-MIMO transmission or UL-OFDMA (channel-based UL-OFDMA (UL-MU- MC) or resource unit based UL-OFDMA) transmission can be grasped. However, ascertaining the capability of supporting UL-MU-MIMO transmission or UL-MU-MC (channel-based UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MC) or resource unit-based UL-OFDMA) transmission is not possible. After establishment, it is also possible to grasp by transmitting / receiving management frames and the like. In FIG. 1, wireless terminals 1 to 4 are shown. However, in addition to the illustrated wireless terminals 1 to 4, there may be other wireless terminals that establish a wireless link with the access point 11.
図3は、図1に示したアクセスポイント11および無線端末1~3間の動作シーケンスの一例を示す。無線端末1~4が、それぞれアクセスポイント11に送信するデータを有しており、無線端末1~4からアクセスポイント11へUL-MU送信を行う場合を想定する。
FIG. 3 shows an example of an operation sequence between the access point 11 and the wireless terminals 1 to 3 shown in FIG. Assume that the wireless terminals 1 to 4 each have data to be transmitted to the access point 11 and perform UL-MU transmission from the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to the access point 11.
図において、横方向に延びる実線の矢印で示される区間は、short interframe space(SIFS)を表し、太線の矢印で示される区間は、distributed coordination function interframe space(DIFS)と、CSMA/CAのバックオフ(BackOff)時間との合計(キャリアセンス時間)を表している。ただし、SIFSおよびDIFSは一例であり、予め定めた時間であれば、別の時間(フレーム間隔)でもよい。なお、SIFSおよびDIFSの詳細については別の実施形態で説明する。
In the figure, the section indicated by a solid arrow extending in the horizontal direction represents a short interframe space (SIFS), and the section indicated by a thick arrow is a distributed coordination function interframe (DIFS) and CSMA / CA backoff. This represents the total (carrier sense time) with (BackOff) time. However, SIFS and DIFS are examples, and other times (frame intervals) may be used as long as they are predetermined times. Details of SIFS and DIFS will be described in another embodiment.
図3の動作シーケンス例では、無線端末1による要求フレーム21の送信から、アクセスポイント11による通知フレーム28の送信完了までの要求フェーズ(Request Phase)と、通知フレーム28の送信完了後からBlockACKフレームの送信完了までのデータ送信フェーズ(Data Transmission Phase)を備えている。後述するように、要求フェーズでは、各無線端末は、アクセスポイントから送信される問い合わせフレーム22またはポーリングフレームへの応答として、要求フレームを送信する。つまり、アクセスポイントは、中央制御型のアクセス制御で、各無線端末に要求フレームを送信させる。
In the operation sequence example of FIG. 3, a request phase (Request Phase) from the transmission of the request frame 21 by the wireless terminal 1 to the completion of the transmission of the notification frame 28 by the access point 11 and the BlockACK frame after the transmission of the notification frame 28 is completed. It has a data transmission phase (Data Transmission Phase) until transmission is completed. As will be described later, in the request phase, each wireless terminal transmits a request frame as a response to the inquiry frame 22 or the polling frame transmitted from the access point. That is, the access point causes each wireless terminal to transmit a request frame by central control type access control.
無線端末1において、アップリンク送信用のデータが発生すると、無線端末1が、UL-MU送信での送信を要求するため、データ送信の許可を要求する要求フレーム21をアクセスポイント11に送信する。無線端末1は要求フレーム21を送信するため、DIFSとランダムに決定したバックオフ時間の間、キャリアセンスを行い、送信権を獲得する。無線端末2~4も、アップリンク送信用のデータを有し、それぞれ要求フレームの送信のための送信権の獲得を試みるが、ここでは無線端末1が送信権を獲得したものとする。無線端末1は、TXOP(Transmission Opportunity;送信権獲得期間)の間に、要求フレーム21を送信する。要求フレーム21は、アクセスポイント11がUL-MU送信の実行決定のトリガとなるフレームであり、トリガ要求フレームと呼ぶ場合がある。またトリガ要求フレームを送信した無線端末をトリガ端末と呼ぶことがある。
When data for uplink transmission is generated in the wireless terminal 1, the wireless terminal 1 transmits a request frame 21 for requesting permission for data transmission to the access point 11 in order to request transmission by UL-MU transmission. In order to transmit the request frame 21, the wireless terminal 1 performs carrier sense during DIFS and a randomly determined backoff time, and acquires a transmission right. The wireless terminals 2 to 4 also have data for uplink transmission, and each attempt to acquire a transmission right for transmitting a request frame. Here, it is assumed that the wireless terminal 1 has acquired the transmission right. The wireless terminal 1 transmits a request frame 21 during TXOP (Transmission Opportunity). The request frame 21 is a frame that triggers the access point 11 to execute the UL-MU transmission, and may be referred to as a trigger request frame. A wireless terminal that has transmitted a trigger request frame may be referred to as a trigger terminal.
ここで、要求フレームは、一般的なMACフレームのフォーマットをベースに定義することができる。図4にMACフレームフォーマットの基本形を示す。MACフレームフォーマットの基本形は、フレームコントロール(Frame Control)フィールド、デュレーション(Duration)フィールド、アドレス(Address)フィールド1~3、シーケンスコントロール(Sequence Control)フィールド、アドレス4フィールド、Dataフィールド、Check-sumフィールドを有する。図4は、一般的なフレーム構成を示しており、フレームによっては一部のフィールドがなかったりする。
Here, the request frame can be defined based on a general MAC frame format. FIG. 4 shows the basic form of the MAC frame format. The basic form of the MAC frame format consists of a frame control field, a duration field, an address field 1 to 3, a sequence control field, an address 4 field, a data field, and a check-sum field. Have. FIG. 4 shows a general frame structure, and some fields may not exist depending on the frame.
フレームコントロールフィールドには、データフレーム(Data frame)、管理フレーム(Management frame)、制御フレーム(Control frame)の3つのフレーム種別を区別するためのタイプ(Type)フィールドが設けられる。さらに詳細なフレーム種別を区別するためにフレームコントロールフィールドには、サブタイプ(Subtype)フィールドが設けられている。要求フレームの場合、例えばタイプは制御フレームを表す値とし、サブタイプの値は、要求フレーム用に新規に定義した値とする。ただし、要求フレームのフレームタイプは、制御フレームではなく、管理フレームまたはデータフレームとする構成も排除されない。なお、制御フレーム、管理フレームおよびデータフレームの詳細については、別の実施形態で説明する。
In the frame control field, a type (Type) field for distinguishing three frame types of a data frame (Data frame), a management frame (Management frame), and a control frame (Control frame) is provided. In order to distinguish more detailed frame types, a subtype field is provided in the frame control field. In the case of a request frame, for example, the type is a value representing a control frame, and the value of the subtype is a value newly defined for the request frame. However, a configuration in which the frame type of the request frame is not a control frame but a management frame or a data frame is not excluded. Details of the control frame, the management frame, and the data frame will be described in another embodiment.
デュレーションフィールドには、媒体予約時間が設定される。他無線端末宛ての(自己宛てでない)フレームを受信した場合に、この媒体予約時間に亘って、媒体が仮想的にビジーであると判定する。このような仮想的に媒体をビジーであると判定する仕組み、或いは、仮想的に媒体をビジーであるとする期間は、NAV(Network Allocation Vector)と呼ばれる。また、シーケンスコントロールフィールドには、フレームのシーケンス番号等が設定される。
The media reservation time is set in the duration field. When a frame addressed to another wireless terminal (not addressed to itself) is received, it is determined that the medium is virtually busy over the medium reservation time. Such a mechanism for virtually determining that a medium is busy, or a period during which a medium is virtually busy is referred to as NAV (Network Allocation Vector). In the sequence control field, a frame sequence number and the like are set.
アドレス1フィールドには、フレームの受信先アドレス(RA)を設定する。要求フレームの受信先はアクセスポイント11であるため、アドレス1フィールドにはアクセスポイント11のアドレスを設定する。アクセスポイント11のアドレスとは、具体的に、アクセスポイント11のMACアドレスあるいはBSSIDである。アドレス2フィールドには、フレームの送信元のアドレス(TA)を設定する。要求フレームの送信元は無線端末1であるため、アドレス2フィールドには、無線端末1のMACアドレスを設定すればよい。チェックサムフィールドには、受信側でフレームボディ部の誤り検出のため用いられるチェックサム符号としてFCS(Frame Check Sequence)情報が設定される。FCS情報の例としては、CRC(Cyclic Redundancy Code)などがある。なお、アドレス3フィールドおよびアドレス4フィールドには、フレームの種類に応じて、送信元端末または送信先端末のアドレス等を設定する。これらの一方または両方が省略されることもある。
In the address 1 field, set the receiving address (RA) of the frame. Since the access destination of the request frame is the access point 11, the address of the access point 11 is set in the address 1 field. The address of the access point 11 is specifically the MAC address or BSSID of the access point 11. The address (TA) of the frame transmission source is set in the address 2 field. Since the transmission source of the request frame is the wireless terminal 1, the MAC address of the wireless terminal 1 may be set in the address 2 field. In the checksum field, FCS (Frame Check Sequence) information is set as a checksum code used for detecting an error in the frame body portion on the receiving side. Examples of FCS information include CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Code). In the address 3 field and address 4 field, the address of the transmission source terminal or the transmission destination terminal is set according to the type of frame. One or both of these may be omitted.
データフィールドには、宛先の装置(要求フレームの場合、アクセスポイント11)に通知する任意の情報を設定する。例えば、アップリンク送信を希望するデータサイズを表す値や、アプリケーションで許容される通信遅延(許容遅延)の値を設定してもよい。また、希望するストリーム数、または、チャネル数およびチャネル番号等を設定してもよい。これらのデータサイズや許容遅延は、アクセスポイント11が、この無線端末1を今回のUL-MU送信の対象として選択するか否かの判断や、UL-MU送信で許容する送信データサイズの決定に利用できる。なお、データサイズや許容遅延等の情報の通知は必須では無い。
In the data field, arbitrary information to be notified to the destination device (in the case of a request frame, access point 11) is set. For example, a value indicating a data size desired for uplink transmission or a communication delay (allowable delay) value allowed by an application may be set. Further, the desired number of streams, or the number of channels and the channel number may be set. These data sizes and allowable delays are used to determine whether or not the access point 11 selects the wireless terminal 1 as a target for the current UL-MU transmission, and to determine the transmission data size allowed for the UL-MU transmission. Available. Note that notification of information such as data size and allowable delay is not essential.
アクセスポイント11は、無線端末1から要求フレーム21を受信すると、UL-MU送信の実行を決定する。アクセスポイント11は、UL-MU送信のための準備として、要求フレーム21を送信した無線端末1以外に、アップリンク送信用のデータを有する無線端末が存在するかを確認するため、アップリンク送信用のデータを有するかを問い合わせる無線端末(送信候補端末)を選択する。アクセスポイント11は、無線リンクを確立しかつ、UL-MU送信に対応する無線端末の中から、無線端末1以外の1つまたは複数の無線端末を選択する。アクセスポイント11は、選択した無線端末(送信候補端末)を特定する情報として、選択した無線端末の識別子を用いることができる。アクセスポイント11は、選択した無線端末の識別子を、データ送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる問い合わせフレーム22に設定する。具体的には、問い合わせフレーム22における、選択した無線端末毎の端末情報フィールドに設定する。選択する無線端末と無線端末1との合計数は、UL-MU送信の多重可能最大数または希望多重数と同じ値でもよいし、これより大きくても、小さくてもよい。
When the access point 11 receives the request frame 21 from the wireless terminal 1, the access point 11 determines execution of UL-MU transmission. In preparation for UL-MU transmission, the access point 11 checks whether there is a wireless terminal having data for uplink transmission other than the wireless terminal 1 that transmitted the request frame 21. A wireless terminal (transmission candidate terminal) that inquires whether or not it has the data is selected. The access point 11 establishes a wireless link and selects one or a plurality of wireless terminals other than the wireless terminal 1 from wireless terminals corresponding to UL-MU transmission. The access point 11 can use the identifier of the selected wireless terminal as information for specifying the selected wireless terminal (transmission candidate terminal). The access point 11 sets the identifier of the selected wireless terminal in the inquiry frame 22 that inquires whether there is a data transmission request. Specifically, it is set in the terminal information field for each selected wireless terminal in the inquiry frame 22. The total number of radio terminals and radio terminals 1 to be selected may be the same value as the maximum multiplexable number or desired multiplex number of UL-MU transmission, or may be larger or smaller.
選択する無線端末も、任意の方法で決定すればよい。ラウンドロビンで選択する方法でもよいし、ランダムで選択する方法でもよい。または、無線端末1とサイズが同じ、または近いと予測されるデータを有する無線端末(例えば現在時刻から遡ってある期間内に無線端末1と同じまたは近いサイズのデータを送信した無線端末)を選択する方法、または無線端末1とデータの発生周期が同じ、または近い無線端末を選択する方法でもよい。または、事前に各無線端末との伝搬路応答を把握している場合は、空間相関の小さい(干渉の小さい)無線端末の組み合わせを選択してもよい。
The wireless terminal to be selected may be determined by an arbitrary method. The selection method may be a round robin method or a random selection method. Or, select a wireless terminal having data that is predicted to be the same or close in size as the wireless terminal 1 (for example, a wireless terminal that has transmitted data having the same or close size as the wireless terminal 1 within a period retroactive from the current time). Or a method of selecting a wireless terminal having the same or close data generation cycle as that of the wireless terminal 1. Alternatively, when the channel response with each wireless terminal is grasped in advance, a combination of wireless terminals having a small spatial correlation (small interference) may be selected.
ここで、問い合わせフレーム22について、さらに詳細に説明する。問い合わせフレーム22は、要求フレームと同様に、図4に示した一般的なMACフレームのフォーマットをベースに定義すればよい。フレームコントロールフィールドのタイプは制御フレームを表す値とし、サブタイプの値は、問い合わせフレーム用に新規に定義した値とすればよい。ただし、問い合わせフレームのフレームタイプは、制御フレームではなく、管理フレームまたはデータフレームとする構成も排除されない。受信先アドレスは、ブロードキャストアドレスまたはマルチキャストアドレスとし、アドレス1フィールドに設定すればよい。また送信元アドレスは、アクセスポイント11のアドレスとし、アドレス2フィールドに設定すればよい。データフィールドには、選択した無線端末(送信候補端末)毎の端末情報フィールドを設け、選択した無線端末の識別子を、それぞれ対応する端末情報フィールドに設定する。
Here, the inquiry frame 22 will be described in more detail. The inquiry frame 22 may be defined based on the general MAC frame format shown in FIG. 4 in the same manner as the request frame. The frame control field type may be a value representing a control frame, and the subtype value may be a newly defined value for the inquiry frame. However, a configuration in which the frame type of the inquiry frame is not a control frame but a management frame or a data frame is not excluded. The receiving address may be a broadcast address or a multicast address and set in the address 1 field. The source address may be the address of the access point 11 and set in the address 2 field. The data field is provided with a terminal information field for each selected wireless terminal (transmission candidate terminal), and the identifier of the selected wireless terminal is set in the corresponding terminal information field.
図5に、無線端末毎の端末情報フィールドの例を示す。端末情報フィールド1(STA info 1)~端末情報フィールドn(STA info n)まで、n個の端末情報フィールドが示される。端末情報フィールド数は、選択した端末数と同じでよい。無線端末の識別子は、無線端末のMACアドレスでもよいし、アソシエーション時にアクセスポイント11が割り当てるアソシエーションID(AID)、その他、端末間でユニークな任意のIDでもよい。また、端末情報フィールドには、当該選択した無線端末に個別に通知する情報があれば、その情報を設定してもよい。
FIG. 5 shows an example of a terminal information field for each wireless terminal. From the terminal information field 1 (STA info 1) to the terminal information field n (STA info n), n terminal information fields are indicated. The number of terminal information fields may be the same as the selected number of terminals. The identifier of the wireless terminal may be the MAC address of the wireless terminal, an association ID (AID) assigned by the access point 11 at the time of association, or any other ID unique among the terminals. Further, if there is information to be individually notified to the selected wireless terminal, the information may be set in the terminal information field.
ここで、アクセスポイント11は、複数の無線端末を選択する場合に、問い合わせフレーム22に対する応答として、要求フレームの送信を行わせる無線端末の識別子を、所定位置の端末情報フィールドに設定する。一例として、先頭の端末情報フィールド(STA info 1)に設定する。以下では、これを想定して説明を続ける。先頭以外の端末情報フィールドに設定された無線端末に対しては、問い合わせフレーム22の送信後に、ポーリングフレームを順番に送信することで、ポーリングフレームに対する応答として、要求フレームを送信させる。先頭の端末情報フィールドに識別子が設定された無線端末(以下、先頭の無線端末)については、問い合わせフレーム22に対する応答として要求フレームを送信することで、ポーリングフレームによる問い合わせを不要とできるため、要求フェーズの長さをその分短くできる。また、要求フレームの受信を受け付け可能な期間(要求フレームの募集期間)が決まっている場合に、先頭の無線端末については、確実に要求フレームを送信させる可能性を高めることができる。つまり、末尾側の無線端末は、要求フレームの収集処理の途中で、募集期間が終了して、要求フレームを送信する機会が与えられなくなる可能性がある(例えば先頭側の無線端末、あるいは後続の無線端末が要求フレームの再送を繰り返し行った場合など)。
Here, when selecting a plurality of wireless terminals, the access point 11 sets the identifier of the wireless terminal that transmits the request frame in the terminal information field at a predetermined position as a response to the inquiry frame 22. As an example, it is set in the head terminal information field (STA info 1). In the following, the description will be continued assuming this. For the wireless terminal set in the terminal information field other than the head, the request frame is transmitted as a response to the polling frame by transmitting the polling frame in order after the inquiry frame 22 is transmitted. For a wireless terminal whose identifier is set in the first terminal information field (hereinafter referred to as the first wireless terminal), a request frame is transmitted as a response to the inquiry frame 22 so that an inquiry by a polling frame can be made unnecessary. Can be shortened accordingly. In addition, when a period during which reception of a request frame can be accepted (request frame recruitment period) is determined, the possibility of reliably transmitting the request frame can be increased for the leading wireless terminal. In other words, the end wireless terminal may not be given an opportunity to transmit the request frame after the recruitment period ends in the middle of request frame collection processing (for example, the first wireless terminal or the subsequent wireless terminal For example, when the wireless terminal repeatedly resends the request frame).
アクセスポイント11は、上述したフォーマットを有する問い合わせフレーム22を要求フレーム21の受信完了からSIFS後に送信する。アクセスポイント11から送信された問い合わせフレーム22を受信した無線端末は、先頭の端末情報フィールドで自装置が指定されているかを確認する。先頭の端末情報フィールドで自装置が指定されている場合は、要求フレームを生成して、問い合わせフレーム22の受信完了からSIFS後に、アクセスポイント11に送信する(第1動作)。先頭の端末情報フィールドで指定されていない場合は、他の端末情報フィールドのいずれかで指定されているかを確認し、他の端末情報フィールドのいずれかで自装置が指定されている場合は、その後にアクセスポイント11から送信されるポーリングフレームの受信を待機する。この場合、後述するように、無線端末は、アクセスポイント11からポーリングフレームを受信したら、要求フレームを送信する(第2動作)。このように無線端末は、問い合わせフレーム22に基づいて第1動作または第2動作を選択し、選択した動作を実行する。ここで先頭の端末情報フィールド以外で指定されている場合、自装置が先頭の端末情報フィールドから何番目の端末情報フィールドで指定されているか(つまり、自装置の優先順位)を確認し、優先順位に応じてアクセスポイント11から送信されるポーリングフレームの送信が開始されるまでの時間を計算し、その時間の間、パワーセーブモードなど、低消費電力状態に遷移してもよい。この場合、アクセスポイント11は、先頭の次の端末情報フィールドに指定した無線端末から順番にポーリングフレームを送信するとし、ポーリングフレームおよび要求フレームの長さは固定であるとする。よって、無線端末は、自装置宛にポーリングフレームが送信される最も早いタイミングを算出できる。
The access point 11 transmits an inquiry frame 22 having the above-described format after SIFS from the completion of reception of the request frame 21. The wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame 22 transmitted from the access point 11 confirms whether its own apparatus is specified in the head terminal information field. When the own terminal is specified in the head terminal information field, a request frame is generated and transmitted to the access point 11 after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22 (first operation). If it is not specified in the first terminal information field, check whether it is specified in one of the other terminal information fields. If the local device is specified in one of the other terminal information fields, then The reception of the polling frame transmitted from the access point 11 is awaited. In this case, as will be described later, when receiving the polling frame from the access point 11, the wireless terminal transmits a request frame (second operation). As described above, the wireless terminal selects the first operation or the second operation based on the inquiry frame 22, and executes the selected operation. If it is specified in a field other than the first terminal information field, check the number of the first terminal information field from the first terminal information field (that is, the priority of the own device) and check the priority. In response to this, a time until transmission of a polling frame transmitted from the access point 11 is calculated may be calculated, and during that time, a transition may be made to a low power consumption state such as a power save mode. In this case, it is assumed that the access point 11 sequentially transmits polling frames from the wireless terminal specified in the next terminal information field at the head, and the lengths of the polling frame and the request frame are fixed. Therefore, the wireless terminal can calculate the earliest timing at which the polling frame is transmitted to its own device.
図3の例では、問い合わせフレーム22の先頭の端末情報フィールド1で無線端末2が指定されており、無線端末2は、問い合わせフレーム22の受信完了からSIFS後に、データ送信の要求の有無を通知する要求フレーム23をアクセスポイント11に送信する。すなわち、無線端末2は、問い合わせフレーム22の受信完了からSIFS後に、要求フレームを送信する第1動作を行う。
In the example of FIG. 3, the wireless terminal 2 is specified in the terminal information field 1 at the head of the inquiry frame 22, and the wireless terminal 2 notifies the presence / absence of a data transmission request after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22. The request frame 23 is transmitted to the access point 11. That is, the wireless terminal 2 performs a first operation of transmitting a request frame after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22.
要求フレーム23のフォーマットは、要求フレーム21(トリガ要求フレーム)のフォーマットと同じでもよいし、異なってもよい。例えばアップリンク送信用のデータの有無を表すフィールド(送信データ有無フィールド)を要求フレーム21のフォーマットに追加してもよい。アップリンク送信用のデータが有るときは当該送信データ有無フィールドにビットを立て、そのようなデータが無いときは、当該送信データ有無フィールドのビットをオフにする。要求フレーム23を受信したアクセスポイント11は、当該フィールドにビットが立っているかを確認し、ビットが立っているときのみ、データサイズフィールドや許容遅延フィールド等(これらのフィールドが存在すれば)を、確認するようにしてもよい。あるいは、要求フレームのフォーマットに送信データ有無フィールドが存在せず、かつアップリンク送信用のデータが存在しない場合は、データサイズフィールドの値を0に設定することで、アップリンク送信用のデータが存在しないことをアクセスポイント11に通知してもよい。なお、トリガ要求フレーム(要求フレーム21)にも送信データ有無フィールドが存在してもよい。
The format of the request frame 23 may be the same as or different from the format of the request frame 21 (trigger request frame). For example, a field indicating whether or not there is data for uplink transmission (transmission data presence / absence field) may be added to the format of the request frame 21. When there is data for uplink transmission, a bit is set in the transmission data presence / absence field, and when there is no such data, the bit of the transmission data presence / absence field is turned off. The access point 11 that has received the request frame 23 checks whether a bit is set in the field, and only when the bit is set, the data size field, the allowable delay field, and the like (if these fields exist) You may make it confirm. Alternatively, if there is no transmission data presence / absence field in the format of the request frame and there is no data for uplink transmission, the data for uplink transmission exists by setting the value of the data size field to 0 It may be notified to the access point 11 that it will not. Note that a transmission data presence / absence field may also exist in the trigger request frame (request frame 21).
無線端末3、4は、自装置の識別子が問い合わせフレーム22の先頭の端末情報フィールド1に指定されておらず、それぞれ2番目、3番目の端末情報フィールド2、3に指定されていることを確認する。
The wireless terminals 3 and 4 confirm that their own identifiers are not specified in the first terminal information field 1 of the inquiry frame 22 and are specified in the second and third terminal information fields 2 and 3, respectively. To do.
無線端末2から要求フレーム23を受信したアクセスポイント11は、要求フレーム23を解析して、無線端末2がアップリンク送信用のデータを有することを把握する。また、要求フレーム23のフレームフォーマットに応じて、データのサイズまたは許容遅延等も把握する。アクセスポイント11は、2番目の端末情報フィールド2に指定した無線端末3に対して、要求フレームの送信を指示するポーリングフレーム24を、要求フレーム23の受信完了からSIFS後に送信する。
The access point 11 that has received the request frame 23 from the wireless terminal 2 analyzes the request frame 23 and grasps that the wireless terminal 2 has data for uplink transmission. In addition, according to the frame format of the request frame 23, the data size or allowable delay is also grasped. The access point 11 transmits a polling frame 24 instructing transmission of a request frame to the wireless terminal 3 specified in the second terminal information field 2 after SIFS from completion of reception of the request frame 23.
ポーリングフレーム24は、要求フレーム21、23や問い合わせフレーム22と同様に、図4に示した一般的なMACフレームのフォーマットをベースに定義すればよい。フレームコントロールフィールドのタイプは制御フレームを表す値とし、サブタイプの値は、ポーリングフレーム用に新規に定義した値とすればよい。ただし、ポーリングフレームのフレームタイプは、制御フレームではなく、管理フレームまたはデータフレームとする構成も排除されない。受信先アドレスは、ポーリングフレームの送信先(本例では無線端末3)のMACアドレスとし、アドレス1フィールドに設定すればよい。また送信元アドレスは、アクセスポイント11のアドレスとし、アドレス2フィールドに設定すればよい。データフィールドには、無線端末3の識別子を設定して、無線端末3が指定されていることを明示的に通知してもよいし、ポーリングフレーム24の受信先アドレスが無線端末3であることから、無線端末3が指定されていることが分かるため、データフィールド自体を省略することも可能である。
As with the request frames 21 and 23 and the inquiry frame 22, the polling frame 24 may be defined based on the general MAC frame format shown in FIG. The frame control field type may be a value representing a control frame, and the subtype value may be a newly defined value for a polling frame. However, the configuration in which the frame type of the polling frame is not a control frame but a management frame or a data frame is not excluded. The reception destination address may be the MAC address of the polling frame transmission destination (in this example, the wireless terminal 3) and may be set in the address 1 field. The source address may be the address of the access point 11 and set in the address 2 field. In the data field, the identifier of the wireless terminal 3 may be set to explicitly notify that the wireless terminal 3 is designated, or the receiving address of the polling frame 24 is the wireless terminal 3. Since it is understood that the wireless terminal 3 is designated, the data field itself can be omitted.
ポーリングフレーム24を受信した無線端末3は、受信完了からSIFS後に要求フレーム25を送信する。すなわち、無線端末3は、ポーリングフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に、要求フレームを送信する第2動作を行う。要求フレーム25の詳細は、要求フレーム23と同様であるため、説明を省略する。
The wireless terminal 3 that has received the polling frame 24 transmits a request frame 25 after SIFS from completion of reception. That is, the wireless terminal 3 performs a second operation of transmitting a request frame after SIFS from completion of reception of the polling frame. Details of the request frame 25 are the same as those of the request frame 23, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
無線端末3から要求フレーム25を受信したアクセスポイント11は、要求フレーム25を解析して、無線端末3がアップリンク送信用のデータを有することを把握する。また、要求フレーム25のフレームフォーマットに応じて、データのサイズまたは許容遅延等も把握する。次に、アクセスポイント11は、3番目の端末情報フィールド3に指定した無線端末4に対して、無線端末3の場合と同様にして、要求フレームの送信を指示するポーリングフレーム26を送信する。
The access point 11 that has received the request frame 25 from the wireless terminal 3 analyzes the request frame 25 and grasps that the wireless terminal 3 has data for uplink transmission. In addition, according to the frame format of the request frame 25, the data size or allowable delay is also grasped. Next, the access point 11 transmits a polling frame 26 instructing transmission of a request frame to the wireless terminal 4 specified in the third terminal information field 3 in the same manner as in the wireless terminal 3.
ポーリングフレーム26を受信した無線端末4は、受信完了からSIFS後に要求フレーム27を送信する。すなわち、無線端末4は、ポーリングフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に、要求フレームを送信する第2動作を行う。要求フレーム27の詳細は、要求フレーム23、25と同様であるため、説明を省略する。
The wireless terminal 4 that has received the polling frame 26 transmits a request frame 27 after SIFS from completion of reception. That is, the wireless terminal 4 performs a second operation of transmitting a request frame after SIFS from the completion of polling frame reception. The details of the request frame 27 are the same as those of the request frames 23 and 25, and thus description thereof is omitted.
無線端末4から要求フレーム27を受信したアクセスポイント11は、要求フレーム27を解析して、無線端末4がアップリンク送信用のデータを有することを把握する。また、要求フレーム27のフレームフォーマットに応じて、データのサイズまたは許容遅延等も把握する。
The access point 11 that has received the request frame 27 from the wireless terminal 4 analyzes the request frame 27 and grasps that the wireless terminal 4 has data for uplink transmission. Further, the data size or allowable delay is also grasped according to the frame format of the request frame 27.
アクセスポイント11は、予め定めた条件が成立した場合は、募集期間を終了し、要求フレームの受信を打ち切る。アクセスポイント11は、UL-MU送信を許可する対象装置となる無線端末を選択し、UL-MU送信の開始トリガとなる、選択した無線端末を指定した通知フレーム28を送信する。
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the access point 11 ends the recruitment period and stops receiving the request frame. The access point 11 selects a wireless terminal that is a target device that is permitted to transmit UL-MU, and transmits a notification frame 28 that designates the selected wireless terminal that is a trigger for starting UL-MU transmission.
予め定めた条件としては、問い合わせフレーム21の送信完了から事前に定めた時間(制限時間)に達した場合がある。または、当該事前に定めた時間に達したことと、問い合わせフレーム22で指定した無線端末のすべてからの要求フレームの受信完了の一方が成立した場合がある。または、アップリンク送信用のデータを有するとの要求フレームを通知した無線端末がトリガ端末を含めて所定値に一致した場合がる。ここで述べた例は一例であり、他の条件でもかまわない。
As a predetermined condition, there is a case where a predetermined time (time limit) has been reached after the transmission of the inquiry frame 21 is completed. Alternatively, there may be a case where one of the time set in advance and the completion of reception of request frames from all of the wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame 22 is established. Alternatively, the wireless terminal that has notified the request frame that it has data for uplink transmission may match a predetermined value including the trigger terminal. The example described here is an example, and other conditions may be used.
ここで、制限時間に関して、問い合わせフレーム22に、制限時間(Time Limit)を格納するフィールドを用意し、このフィールドで、募集期間の制限時間を通知してもよい。問い合わせフレームで指定された無線端末は、アップリンク送信用のデータがある場合でも、制限時間までにアクセスポイント11での受信が間に合うタイミングでポーリングフレームを受信しない場合(または制限時間を経過した場合)は、今回のUL-MU送信に自装置は参加しないと判断し、ポーリングフレームの受信待ちを解除してもよい。
Here, regarding the time limit, a field for storing the time limit (Time Limit) may be prepared in the inquiry frame 22, and the time limit of the recruitment period may be notified in this field. Even if there is data for uplink transmission, the wireless terminal specified by the inquiry frame does not receive the polling frame at the timing when reception at the access point 11 is in time by the time limit (or when the time limit elapses) May determine that the own device does not participate in the current UL-MU transmission, and release the waiting for polling frame reception.
図3の例では、アクセスポイント11は、問い合わせフレーム22で指定した無線端末のすべてから要求フレーム23、25、27を受信したため、募集期間を終了する。アクセスポイント11は、UL-MU送信を許可する無線端末を決定する際、多重可能な最大値以下である限り、要求フレームを送信したすべての無線端末(トリガ端末を含む)を選択してもよいし、任意の基準でUL-MU送信を許可する無線端末を絞り込んでもよい。例えば、最も送信データのサイズが大きい無線端末から優先的に選択してもよいし、緊急度が高いデータを有する無線端末から優先的に選択してもよい。後者の場合、要求フレームでデータの緊急度、もしくはデータの種別も通知しておくものとする。
In the example of FIG. 3, since the access point 11 has received the request frames 23, 25, and 27 from all of the wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame 22, the recruitment period ends. The access point 11 may select all the wireless terminals (including the trigger terminal) that transmitted the request frame as long as the wireless terminal is allowed to transmit UL-MU as long as it is below the maximum value that can be multiplexed. However, the wireless terminals that are allowed to transmit UL-MU may be narrowed down according to an arbitrary standard. For example, the wireless terminal with the largest transmission data size may be preferentially selected, or the wireless terminal having data with a high degree of urgency may be preferentially selected. In the latter case, it is assumed that the urgency of data or the type of data is also notified in the request frame.
アクセスポイント11は、募集期間を終了させた後、CSAM/CAのアクセス制御に従ってキャリアセンスを行って送信権を獲得し、TXOP(Transmission Opportunity;送信権獲得期間)の間に、UL-MU送信のトリガとなる通知フレーム28を送信する。ここでは要求フレーム27を受信完了した時点で募集期間を終了させ、その時点からキャリアセンスを行い、送信権を獲得して、通知フレーム28を生成する。または、アクセスポイント11は、最後に受信した要求フレーム27の受信完了からSIFS後に、通知フレーム28を送信するようにしてもよい。
After completing the recruitment period, the access point 11 performs carrier sense according to CSAM / CA access control to acquire a transmission right, and transmits a UL-MU transmission during TXOP (Transmission Opportunity). A notification frame 28 serving as a trigger is transmitted. Here, the reception period ends when reception of the request frame 27 is completed, carrier sense is performed from that point, a transmission right is acquired, and a notification frame 28 is generated. Alternatively, the access point 11 may transmit the notification frame 28 after SIFS from the completion of reception of the last received request frame 27.
ここで、通知フレーム28は、要求フレームや問い合わせフレーム、ポーリングフレームと同様に、図4に示した一般的なMACフレームのフォーマットをベースに定義すればよい。フレームコントロールフィールドのタイプは制御フレームを表す値とし、サブタイプの値は、通知フレーム用に新規に定義した値とすればよい。ただし、通知フレームのフレームタイプは、制御フレームではなく、管理フレームまたはデータフレームとする構成も排除されない。受信先アドレスは、ブロードキャストアドレスまたはマルチキャストアドレスとし、アドレス1フィールドに設定すればよい。また送信元アドレスは、アクセスポイント11のアドレスとし、アドレス2フィールドに設定すればよい。データフィールドには、UL-MU送信を許可した端末数に応じた個数分、端末情報フィールドを、問い合わせフレームと同様に、図5に示したように設定する。図3の例では、無線端末1~4にUL-MU送信を許可するため、4つの端末情報フィールド1~4を設定する。各端末情報フィールドには、送信許可した無線端末の識別子、および必要に応じて、送信用のパラメータ情報などの情報を設定する。
Here, the notification frame 28 may be defined on the basis of the general MAC frame format shown in FIG. 4 in the same manner as the request frame, the inquiry frame, and the polling frame. The frame control field type may be a value representing a control frame, and the subtype value may be a newly defined value for the notification frame. However, a configuration in which the frame type of the notification frame is not a control frame but a management frame or a data frame is not excluded. The receiving address may be a broadcast address or a multicast address and set in the address 1 field. The source address may be the address of the access point 11 and set in the address 2 field. In the data field, terminal information fields corresponding to the number of terminals permitted to transmit UL-MU are set as shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as the inquiry frame. In the example of FIG. 3, four terminal information fields 1 to 4 are set in order to allow the wireless terminals 1 to 4 to transmit UL-MU. In each terminal information field, information such as identifiers of wireless terminals permitted to transmit, and parameter information for transmission is set as necessary.
端末情報フィールドに設定する無線端末の識別子は、端末のMACアドレスでもよいし、アソシエーションID(AID)、その他、端末間でユニークなIDでもよい。また、端末情報フィールドには、UL-MU送信時に無線端末が使用するパラメータ情報など、当該無線端末に個別に通知する情報を設定してもよい。パラメータ情報の例として、送信を許可するデータ長、送信を許容する期間、誤り訂正符号方式、送信レートを規定するMCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme:変調符号化方式)の少なくとも1つがある。
The identifier of the wireless terminal set in the terminal information field may be the MAC address of the terminal, an association ID (AID), or other ID that is unique among terminals. In the terminal information field, information individually notified to the wireless terminal, such as parameter information used by the wireless terminal at the time of UL-MU transmission, may be set. Examples of parameter information include at least one of a data length that permits transmission, a period during which transmission is permitted, an error correction code scheme, and an MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) that defines a transmission rate.
さらに、UL-MU-MC送信の場合、該当する無線端末に割り当てる1つまたは複数のチャネルの情報を、パラメータ情報として通知してもよい。チャネルの情報は、例えばチャネル番号によって指定してもよい。複数のチャネルを割りあてる場合、特定のチャネルから高周波側または低周波側に何チャネルか、または特定のチャネルからどれくらいの周波数帯域分かといったように指定してもよい。リソースユニットベースのUL-OFDMAの場合、チャネルの情報に代えて、またはチャネルの情報とともに、無線端末に割り当てるリソースユニットの情報を、パラメータ情報として通知してもよい。
Further, in the case of UL-MU-MC transmission, information on one or a plurality of channels assigned to the corresponding wireless terminal may be notified as parameter information. The channel information may be specified by a channel number, for example. When a plurality of channels are allocated, the number of channels from a specific channel to the high frequency side or the low frequency side or how many frequency bands from the specific channel may be specified. In the case of resource-unit-based UL-OFDMA, information on resource units to be allocated to wireless terminals may be reported as parameter information instead of channel information or together with channel information.
またUL-MU-MIMO送信の場合、UL-MUで送信するデータフレームの先頭に付加するプリアンブル(伝搬路応答の推定のためのプリアンブル)のパターンの情報を、パラメータ情報として通知してもよい。この際、プリアンブルのパターンは、送信許可する無線端末間で互いに直交するようにアクセスポイントは選択するものとする(詳細は後述する)。また、UL-MU-MIMO送信の場合に、無線端末に送信許可するストリーム数を通知フレーム28で通知してもよい。無線端末が対応可能なストリーム数は、事前に端末の能力情報として取得済みであるとする。
In the case of UL-MU-MIMO transmission, information on the pattern of a preamble (preamble for estimating a channel response) to be added to the head of a data frame transmitted by UL-MU may be notified as parameter information. At this time, it is assumed that the access points are selected so that the preamble patterns are orthogonal to each other between transmission-permitted wireless terminals (details will be described later). In the case of UL-MU-MIMO transmission, the notification frame 28 may notify the number of streams permitted to be transmitted to the wireless terminal. It is assumed that the number of streams that can be supported by the wireless terminal has already been acquired as capability information of the terminal.
なお、通知フレーム28に、端末情報フィールドとは別に、送信許可する無線端末間での共通情報(Common Information)を通知するための共通情報フィールドを設けてもよい。共通情報フィールドでは、送信許可した端末群に共通に通知する情報を設定する。例えば各無線端末に許可する送信データサイズ、各無線端末に許可する送信データの種類、端末情報フィールドのフォーマット等を、このフィールドに共通の値として設定してもよい。
Note that, in addition to the terminal information field, the notification frame 28 may be provided with a common information field for notifying common information (Common Information) between wireless terminals permitted to transmit. In the common information field, information that is commonly notified to a group of terminals permitted to transmit is set. For example, the transmission data size permitted for each wireless terminal, the type of transmission data permitted for each wireless terminal, the format of the terminal information field, and the like may be set as common values in this field.
アクセスポイント11から通知フレーム28を受信し、当該通知フレーム28でアップリンク送信を許可された無線端末1~4は、通知フレーム28の受信完了からSIFS後に、アップリンク送信用のデータを含むデータフレーム29、30、31、32を、アクセスポイント11に送信する。これにより、アクセスポイント11は、各無線端末1~4から送信される信号を同時に受信する。すなわち、各無線端末1~4が送信するデータフレームの送信タイミングは互いに同期され、各無線端末1~4から周波数多重または空間多重で送信(すなわちチャネルベースまたはリソースユニットベースのOFDMA、あるいはUL-MU-MIMO送信)される。なお、無線端末がUL-MUで送信するデータが、端末情報フィールドまたは共通情報フィールドで指定されるデータサイズ未満のときは、不足分のパディングデータを付加してもよいし、当該不足分に相当する時間の間は、何も送信の動作を行わないようにしてもよい。
The wireless terminals 1 to 4 that have received the notification frame 28 from the access point 11 and have been permitted to perform uplink transmission in the notification frame 28, receive a data frame including data for uplink transmission after SIFS from completion of reception of the notification frame 28. 29, 30, 31, and 32 are transmitted to the access point 11. As a result, the access point 11 simultaneously receives signals transmitted from the wireless terminals 1 to 4. That is, the transmission timings of the data frames transmitted by the wireless terminals 1 to 4 are synchronized with each other, and are transmitted from the wireless terminals 1 to 4 by frequency multiplexing or spatial multiplexing (that is, channel-based or resource unit-based OFDMA or UL-MU). -MIMO transmission). If the data transmitted by the wireless terminal in UL-MU is less than the data size specified in the terminal information field or common information field, insufficient padding data may be added, which corresponds to the shortage. During this time, no transmission operation may be performed.
なお、先に少し述べたように、UL-MU-MIMO送信のアップリンク送信を許可された各無線端末1、2、3、4が送信するデータフレームの先頭側に伝搬路応答の推定のためのプリアンブル、より具体的には、これらの無線端末間で互いに直交するパターンのプリアンブルを追加してもよい。端末間のプリアンブルの直交化の方法として、時間的、周波数的および符号的のいずれの方法を用いることができる。時間直交の場合には、プリアンブル用のフィールドが複数の区間に分割され、各端末のプリアンブルが異なる区間で送信される。ある区間には、いずれか1台数端末のみがプリアンブルを送信していることになる。つまり、ある端末がプリアンブルを送信する間、他の端末は何も送信しない期間になる。周波数直交の場合には、各端末が互いに直交関係にある周波数でプリアンブル信号を送信する。符号直交の場合には、各端末がそれぞれ直交行列の互いに異なる行(または互いに異なる列)に含まれる値列(より詳細には値列に対応するシンボル列)を配置した信号を送信する。直交行列の各行(または各列)は互いに直交の関係にある。いずれの直交化の方法でも、アクセスポイント11では各端末のプリアンブルを識別可能である。
As described above, for the purpose of estimating the propagation path response on the head side of the data frame transmitted by each wireless terminal 1, 2, 3, 4 that is permitted to perform uplink transmission of UL-MU-MIMO. More specifically, a preamble having a pattern orthogonal to each other between these wireless terminals may be added. As a method for orthogonalizing preambles between terminals, any of temporal, frequency, and coding methods can be used. In the case of time orthogonality, the preamble field is divided into a plurality of sections, and the preamble of each terminal is transmitted in a different section. In any section, only one terminal transmits the preamble. That is, while a certain terminal transmits a preamble, there is a period during which no other terminal transmits anything. In the case of frequency orthogonality, each terminal transmits a preamble signal at a frequency that is orthogonal to each other. In the case of code orthogonality, each terminal transmits a signal in which value strings (more specifically, symbol strings corresponding to the value strings) included in different rows (or different columns) of the orthogonal matrix are arranged. Each row (or each column) of the orthogonal matrix is orthogonal to each other. In any orthogonal method, the access point 11 can identify the preamble of each terminal.
各端末に互いに直交するプリアンブルを使用させるために、各端末が使用するプリアンブルおよびその送信方法の情報を、アクセスポイントは与えておく必要がある、具体的には、時間直交の場合には、どのタイミングでそれぞれプリアンブル(プリアンブルは端末間で同じでもよいし、異なってもよい)を送信するか、周波数直交の場合にはどの周波数でそれぞれプリアンブル(プリアンブル信号は端末間で同じでもよいし、異なってもよい)を送信するか、符号直交の場合にはどの符号化パターン(直交行列のどの行または列のパターン)を用いてプリアンブルを送信するか、の情報が必要となる。
In order for each terminal to use a preamble that is orthogonal to each other, the access point needs to give information on the preamble used by each terminal and its transmission method. Specifically, in the case of time orthogonality, Transmit the preamble (preamble may be the same or different between terminals) at the timing, or in the case of frequency orthogonal, at which frequency the preamble (preamble signal may be the same between terminals or different In the case of code orthogonality, information on which coding pattern (which row or column pattern of the orthogonal matrix) is used to transmit the preamble is required.
図6に物理パケットのフォーマット例を示す。物理ヘッダに相当するフィールド(L-STF、L-LTF、L-SIG、VHT-SIG-A、VHT-STF、VHT-SIG-B)と、MACフレーム(ここではデータフレーム)を設定するフィールド(DATAフィールド)からなる。L-STF、L-LTF、L-SIG、VHT-SIG-Aはすべての無線端末で同じである。L-LTFのシンボルを使って、L-SIGやVHT-SIG-Aを復調できる。L-SIGには、データ長や変調方式等が記載されている。
Fig. 6 shows an example of a physical packet format. Fields (L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, VHT-SIG-A, VHT-STF, VHT-SIG-B) corresponding to the physical header and fields for setting MAC frames (here, data frames) ( DATA field). L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG, and VHT-SIG-A are the same in all wireless terminals. L-SIG and VHT-SIG-A can be demodulated using L-LTF symbols. L-SIG describes the data length, modulation method, and the like.
VHT-SIG-Aには、無線端末1~4の各々のストリーム数やコーディング(BCCやLDPCなどの誤り訂正符号)方式などの端末1~4の情報が記載されている。L-SIGやVHT-SIG-Aは端末間で空間分離できないため、各無線端末のL―SIGやVHT-SIG-Aの値は、同じにする必要がある。このため、アクセスポイント11は通知フレームで各無線端末のストリーム数やコーディング方式を通知し、各無線端末は、他の無線端末のこれらの情報も利用して、VHT-SIG-Aのシンボルを同じ内容で生成する。L-SIGに設定する値は、固定可能なものは事前にシステムで決めておいてもよいし、必要に応じて、通知フレームで通知することも可能である。
VHT-SIG-A describes information of terminals 1 to 4 such as the number of streams of each of wireless terminals 1 to 4 and the coding (error correction code such as BCC or LDPC) method. Since L-SIG and VHT-SIG-A cannot be spatially separated between terminals, the values of L-SIG and VHT-SIG-A of each wireless terminal must be the same. For this reason, the access point 11 notifies the number of streams and the coding method of each wireless terminal in a notification frame, and each wireless terminal uses the same information of other wireless terminals and uses the same VHT-SIG-A symbol. Generate with content. A value that can be set in L-SIG may be determined in advance by the system, or may be notified by a notification frame if necessary.
また、VHT-STFのシンボルも無線端末1~4で同じであるが、VHT-LTFは、次以降のフィールドを空間的に分離するため、無線端末1~4で互いに直交するプリアンブルパターンとする必要がある。そこで、通知フレームにおける端末情報フィールド1~4で、無線端末1~4で互いに直交するプリアンブルパターンを指定しておく。
Also, the VHT-STF symbols are the same in the wireless terminals 1 to 4, but the VHT-LTF needs to have preamble patterns orthogonal to each other in the wireless terminals 1 to 4 in order to spatially separate subsequent fields. There is. Therefore, in the terminal information fields 1 to 4 in the notification frame, preamble patterns that are orthogonal to each other are designated by the wireless terminals 1 to 4.
UL-OFDMAの場合は、各ユーザ(無線端末)を異なるチャネルまたはリソースユニットに割り当てている、つまり周波数で直交しているため、VHT-LTFのプリアンブルパターンが直交する必要はない。このため、各無線端末に共通のプリアンブルパターンを、通知フレームの共通情報フィールド等で指定してもよいし、無線端末毎に任意に決定したプリアンブルパターンを、通知フレームのそれぞれの端末情報フィールドで指定してもよい。または、無線端末との無線リンクの確立時にアクセスポイントが、当該無線端末に任意の管理フレームで、プリアンブルパターンを通知しておいてもよい。また、VHT-SIG-Aの値も、他の無線端末と揃える必要はなく、自装置の部分の値のみ記載すればよい。
In the case of UL-OFDMA, each user (wireless terminal) is assigned to a different channel or resource unit, that is, is orthogonal in frequency, and therefore the VHT-LTF preamble pattern need not be orthogonal. Therefore, a preamble pattern common to each wireless terminal may be specified in the common information field of the notification frame or the like, and a preamble pattern arbitrarily determined for each wireless terminal is specified in each terminal information field of the notification frame. May be. Alternatively, the access point may notify the wireless terminal of the preamble pattern with an arbitrary management frame when establishing a wireless link with the wireless terminal. In addition, the value of VHT-SIG-A does not need to be aligned with other wireless terminals, and only the value of the own device need be described.
アクセスポイント11は、VHT-LTFのプリアンブルを利用して、各無線端末1~4の各々のアンテナと、アクセスポイント11のアンテナ間のアップリンクの伝搬路情報を取得し、この伝搬路情報を利用してプリアンブルより後のVHT-SIG-BやMACフレーム部分(DATAフィールド)の復調を行うことができる。VHT-SIG-Bには、MCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme:変調符号化方式)が設定されている。
Using the VHT-LTF preamble, the access point 11 acquires uplink propagation path information between each antenna of each of the wireless terminals 1 to 4 and the access point 11 antenna, and uses this propagation path information. Thus, the VHT-SIG-B and the MAC frame portion (DATA field) after the preamble can be demodulated. In VHT-SIG-B, MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) is set.
上述したように、アクセスポイント11は、無線端末1~4からアップリンク送信された信号を受信すると、使用するUL-MU方式に応じて信号の受信処理を行い、さらに復調等の物理層の処理を行うことで、各無線端末のデータフレームを取得する。そして、データフレームごとにFCS情報に基づき、データフレームを正常に受信できたかを検査し、正常に受信できたか否かの検査結果を示す確認応答情報を生成する。アクセスポイント11は、各無線端末の確認応答情報を含むBlockACKフレーム33を生成し、生成したBlockACKフレーム33を、UL-MUでデータフレームを送信した無線端末1~4に送信する。
As described above, when the access point 11 receives signals transmitted from the radio terminals 1 to 4 in the uplink, the access point 11 performs signal reception processing according to the UL-MU method to be used, and further performs physical layer processing such as demodulation. To obtain a data frame of each wireless terminal. Then, for each data frame, based on the FCS information, whether or not the data frame has been normally received is inspected, and confirmation response information indicating a result of whether or not the data frame has been normally received is generated. The access point 11 generates a BlockACK frame 33 including the confirmation response information of each wireless terminal, and transmits the generated BlockACK frame 33 to the wireless terminals 1 to 4 that transmitted the data frame by UL-MU.
無線端末1~4は、アクセスポイント11から受信したBlockACKフレームから自装置の送達確認応答情報を検出し、データフレームの送信に成功したか否かを把握する。ここでは、アクセスポイント11からUL-MU送信に対する応答として、BlockACKフレームを送信したが、BlockACKフレームの送信の代わりに、データフレームの受信に成功した無線端末に個別に、ACKフレームを返してもよい。データフレームの受信に成功しなかった無線端末にはACKフレームを返さない。ACKフレームを受信した端末はデータフレームの送信に成功したと判断し、ACKフレームを受信しなかった端末は、データフレームの送信に失敗したと判断する。または、アクセスポイント11は、各無線端末の検査結果を含む複数のフレームを集約したアグリゲーションフレーム(スーパーフレームと呼んでも良い)を送信することも可能である。
The wireless terminals 1 to 4 detect their own acknowledgment response information from the BlockACK frame received from the access point 11 and grasp whether or not the data frame has been successfully transmitted. Here, the Block ACK frame is transmitted as a response to the UL-MU transmission from the access point 11, but instead of transmitting the Block ACK frame, an ACK frame may be individually returned to the wireless terminal that has successfully received the data frame. . An ACK frame is not returned to the wireless terminal that has not successfully received the data frame. The terminal that has received the ACK frame determines that transmission of the data frame has succeeded, and the terminal that has not received the ACK frame determines that transmission of the data frame has failed. Alternatively, the access point 11 can also transmit an aggregation frame (which may be called a super frame) in which a plurality of frames including the inspection result of each wireless terminal are aggregated.
図7は、アクセスポイント11に搭載される無線通信装置の機能ブロック図である。上述したように、アクセスポイント11は無線端末1~4側のネットワークに加え、これとは別のネットワークに接続されてもよい。図7では、無線端末1~4側のネットワークに接続される装置構成を示している。
FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the wireless communication device mounted on the access point 11. As described above, the access point 11 may be connected to a network other than the network on the wireless terminals 1 to 4 side. FIG. 7 shows a device configuration connected to the networks on the wireless terminals 1 to 4 side.
図7の無線通信装置は、制御部101と、送信部102と、受信部103と、アンテナ12A、12B、12C、12Dと、バッファ104とを備えている。制御部101は、無線端末との通信を制御する制御部またはベースバンド集積回路に対応し、送信部102と受信部103は、一例として、アンテナを介してフレームを送受信する無線通信部またはRF集積回路を形成する。制御部101の処理、および送信部102と受信部103のデジタル領域の処理の全部または一部は、CPU等のプロセッサで動作するソフトウェア(プログラム)によって行われてもよいし、ハードウェアによって行われてもよいし、これらのソフトウェアとハードウェアの両方によって行われてもよい。アクセスポイントは、制御部101、送信部102および受信部103の全部または一部の処理を行うプロセッサを備えてもよい。
7 includes a control unit 101, a transmission unit 102, a reception unit 103, antennas 12A, 12B, 12C, and 12D, and a buffer 104. The control unit 101 corresponds to a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit that controls communication with a wireless terminal, and the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103 are, for example, a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated unit that transmits and receives a frame via an antenna. Form a circuit. All or part of the processing of the control unit 101 and the processing of the digital area of the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103 may be performed by software (program) that operates on a processor such as a CPU, or by hardware. It may be performed by both of these software and hardware. The access point may include a processor that performs processing of all or part of the control unit 101, the transmission unit 102, and the reception unit 103.
バッファ104は、上位層と制御部101との間で、データフレームを受け渡しするための記憶部である。上位層は、別のネットワークから受信したフレーム(例えばMACフレームのペイロード部に格納するデータなど)を無線端末側のネットワークへの中継のためバッファ104に格納したり、無線端末側のネットワークから受信したフレームのデータを制御部101から受け取って、上位層へ渡したりする。上位層は、TCP/IPやUDP/IPなど、MAC層より上位の通信処理を行ってもよい。また、上位層は、データを処理するアプリケーション層の処理を行ってもよい。上位層の動作は、CPU等のプロセッサによるソフトウェア(プログラム)の処理によって行われてもよいし、ハードウェアによって行われてもよいし、ソフトウェアとハードウェアの両方によって行われてもよい。
The buffer 104 is a storage unit for transferring data frames between the upper layer and the control unit 101. The upper layer stores a frame received from another network (for example, data stored in the payload portion of the MAC frame) in the buffer 104 for relaying to the network on the wireless terminal side or received from the network on the wireless terminal side The frame data is received from the control unit 101 and transferred to the upper layer. The upper layer may perform communication processing higher than the MAC layer, such as TCP / IP and UDP / IP. Further, the upper layer may perform processing of an application layer that processes data. The upper layer operation may be performed by software (program) processing by a processor such as a CPU, may be performed by hardware, or may be performed by both software and hardware.
制御部101は、主としてMAC層の処理を行う。制御部101は、無線チャネルのアクセスを管理し、所望タイミングにて、フレームの送信を制御する。制御部101は、送信部102および受信部103を介して、フレームを送受信することで、各無線端末との通信を制御する。また制御部101は、定期的にビーコンフレームを送信するよう制御してもよい。制御部101は、クロックを生成するクロック生成部を含んでもよい。また制御部101は外部からクロックが入力されるように構成されてもよい。制御部101は、クロック生成部で生成したクロック、または外部から入力されるクロックによって内部時間を管理してもよい。また、制御部101は、クロック生成部で作ったクロックを、ホストCPU等の外部に出力してもよい。
The control unit 101 mainly performs processing of the MAC layer. The control unit 101 manages access to the wireless channel and controls frame transmission at a desired timing. The control unit 101 controls communication with each wireless terminal by transmitting and receiving frames via the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103. Further, the control unit 101 may perform control so as to periodically transmit a beacon frame. The control unit 101 may include a clock generation unit that generates a clock. The control unit 101 may be configured to receive a clock from the outside. The control unit 101 may manage the internal time using a clock generated by the clock generation unit or a clock input from the outside. The control unit 101 may output the clock generated by the clock generation unit to the outside of the host CPU or the like.
制御部101は、無線端末からのアソシエーション要求を受けて、必要に応じて認証等のプロセスを経て、当該無線端末と無線リンクを確立する。制御部101は、無線リンクを確立した無線端末に関する情報を、内部または外部のアクセス可能な記憶装置を用いて、管理する。
The control unit 101 receives an association request from a wireless terminal and establishes a wireless link with the wireless terminal through a process such as authentication as necessary. The control unit 101 manages information regarding a wireless terminal that has established a wireless link, using an internal or external accessible storage device.
制御部101は、アクセスポイントに接続している任意の無線端末から要求フレームを受信すると、UL-MU送信の実行を決定する。ここで、UL-OFDMA(UL-MU-MC等)かUL-MU-MIMOのどちらを実行するかは、システムとして事前に決まっていてもよいし、アクセスポイントが両方式に対応可能な場合は、要求フレーム内にどちらの方式を希望するかの識別子(方式識別子)を設定し、制御部101が要求フレーム内の方式識別子に基づいて決定してもよい。あるいは、どちららの方式を行うかは、アクセスポイントが自律的に判断して、通知フレーム内で通知してもよい。例えば使用可能なチャネル数が多く空いている場合はUL-OFDMA(UL-MU-MC等)、少ない場合はUL-MU-MIMOなどと決定してもよい。ここでは、システムとしてどちらの方式を行うかは事前に決まっているとする。
When the control unit 101 receives a request frame from an arbitrary wireless terminal connected to the access point, it determines execution of UL-MU transmission. Here, whether to execute UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MC, etc.) or UL-MU-MIMO may be determined in advance as a system, and if the access point can support both types Alternatively, an identifier (method identifier) indicating which method is desired may be set in the request frame, and the control unit 101 may determine based on the method identifier in the request frame. Alternatively, which method is used may be determined by the access point autonomously and notified within the notification frame. For example, UL-OFDMA (UL-MU-MC or the like) may be determined when the number of usable channels is large, and UL-MU-MIMO or the like may be determined when the number is small. Here, it is assumed that which method is to be performed as a system is determined in advance.
制御部101は、UL-MU送信の実行を決定すると、アクセスポイント11に接続している無線端末のうち、要求フレームを送信した無線端末(トリガ端末)以外の無線端末から、アップリンク送信用のデータを有するかを問い合わせる無線端末(送信端末候補)を選択する。制御部101は、選択した無線端末の識別子等をそれぞれの端末情報フィールドに設定し、その他のフィールド(アドレスフィールド等)の設定することで、問い合わせフレームを生成する。
When determining that UL-MU transmission is to be performed, the control unit 101 performs uplink transmission from a wireless terminal connected to the access point 11 other than the wireless terminal (trigger terminal) that transmitted the request frame. A wireless terminal (transmission terminal candidate) that inquires about whether it has data is selected. The control unit 101 sets an identifier or the like of the selected wireless terminal in each terminal information field and sets other fields (address field or the like) to generate an inquiry frame.
制御部101は、生成した問い合わせフレームを、要求フレームの受信完了からSIFS後に送信部102から送信する。あるいは、DIFSとそれに続く乱数を用いて決めたバックオフ時間の間、キャリアセンスを行い、送信権を獲得できたら、TXOPの間に、問い合わせフレームを送信部102から送信してもよい。
The control unit 101 transmits the generated inquiry frame from the transmission unit 102 after SIFS from completion of reception of the request frame. Alternatively, the carrier sense may be performed during the back-off time determined using DIFS and the subsequent random number, and if the transmission right can be acquired, the inquiry frame may be transmitted from the transmission unit 102 during TXOP.
送信部102は、制御部101から入力されたフレームに物理ヘッダの付加や変調処理など、所望の物理層の処理を行う。また、物理層の処理後のフレームに対して、DA変換や、所望帯域の信号成分を抽出するフィルタ処理、周波数変換を行う。送信部102は、周波数変換された信号を増幅して、1つのアンテナまたは複数のアンテナから空間に電波として放射する。なお、図示の例では送信部を1つ設けているが、送信部を複数設け、送信部ごとに1つのアンテナが接続されてもよい。
The transmission unit 102 performs desired physical layer processing such as addition of a physical header and modulation processing on the frame input from the control unit 101. Further, DA conversion, filter processing for extracting a signal component of a desired band, and frequency conversion are performed on the frame after processing in the physical layer. The transmission unit 102 amplifies the frequency-converted signal and radiates it as a radio wave from one antenna or a plurality of antennas. In the illustrated example, one transmission unit is provided, but a plurality of transmission units may be provided, and one antenna may be connected to each transmission unit.
また、制御部101は、受信部103を介して、キャリアセンス情報の管理を行う。具体的に、受信部103から入力する媒体(CCA)のビジーおよびアイドルに関する物理的なキャリアセンス情報と、受信フレームの中に記載されている媒体予約時間に基づく仮想的なキャリアセンス情報との両方を包含してもよい。いずれか一方のキャリアセンス情報がビジーを示すならば、媒体がビジーであるとみなされ、その間の信号の送信が禁止される。
In addition, the control unit 101 manages carrier sense information via the receiving unit 103. Specifically, both the physical carrier sense information regarding busy and idle of the medium (CCA) input from the receiving unit 103 and the virtual carrier sense information based on the medium reservation time described in the received frame May be included. If any one of the carrier sense information indicates busy, the medium is regarded as busy, and signal transmission during that time is prohibited.
各アンテナで受信された信号は、受信部103において増幅され、周波数変換(ダウンコンバート)され、フィルタ処理される。フィルタ処理後の信号は、さらにAD変換によりデジタル信号に変換されて、復調等の物理層の処理を経て、制御部201にフレームが入力される。制御部201は、フレームを解析して、解析結果に応じた動作を行う。なお、UL-MU-MIMO送信でない通常のフレーム(要求フレームなど)の場合は、複数のアンテナのうちいずれか1つのアンテナ(任意のアンテナまたは事前に定めたアンテナ)で受信された信号を処理してもよいし、ダイバーシティ技術を用いて各アンテナで受信した信号を処理してフレームを取得してもよい。あるいは、その他の方法で受信信号を処理してもよい。
The signal received by each antenna is amplified in the receiving unit 103, subjected to frequency conversion (down-conversion), and filtered. The filtered signal is further converted into a digital signal by AD conversion, and a frame is input to the control unit 201 through physical layer processing such as demodulation. The control unit 201 analyzes the frame and performs an operation according to the analysis result. In the case of a normal frame (such as a request frame) that is not UL-MU-MIMO transmission, a signal received by any one of a plurality of antennas (any antenna or a predetermined antenna) is processed. Alternatively, a frame may be obtained by processing a signal received by each antenna using a diversity technique. Alternatively, the received signal may be processed by other methods.
制御部101は、問い合わせフレームの先頭の端末情報フィールドで指定した無線端末から要求フレームを受信したら、当該要求フレームを解析して、その無線端末についてアップリンク送信用のデータの有無や、その他、要求フレームのフォーマットに応じて、データサイズや許容遅延等の情報を把握する。制御部101は、2番目の端末情報フィールドで指定した無線端末に対しポーリングフレームを送信し、その応答として要求フレームを受信および解析する。以降同様にして、末尾の端末情報フィールドで指定された無線端末まで、ポーリングフレームの送信と、要求フレームの受信および解析とを行う。事前に制限時間を設定してもよく、この場合、制限時間に達したら、要求フレームの収集を打ち切る。
When the control unit 101 receives a request frame from the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the head of the inquiry frame, the control unit 101 analyzes the request frame, determines whether there is data for uplink transmission for the wireless terminal, and other requests. Information such as data size and allowable delay is grasped according to the frame format. The control unit 101 transmits a polling frame to the wireless terminal specified in the second terminal information field, and receives and analyzes the request frame as a response. Thereafter, similarly, a polling frame is transmitted and a request frame is received and analyzed up to the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the end. A time limit may be set in advance. In this case, when the time limit is reached, the collection of request frames is terminated.
制御部101は、トリガ端末およびポーリングフレームに対して要求フレームを送信した無線端末の中から、UL-MU送信を行わせる無線端末を選択する。制御部101は、選択した無線端末の識別子およびUL-MU送信用のパラメータ情報をそれぞれ端末情報フィールドに設定した通知フレームを生成し、生成した通知フレームを送信する。
The control unit 101 selects a wireless terminal that performs UL-MU transmission from the trigger terminal and the wireless terminal that transmitted the request frame to the polling frame. The control unit 101 generates a notification frame in which the identifier of the selected wireless terminal and the parameter information for UL-MU transmission are set in the terminal information field, and transmits the generated notification frame.
UL-MU送信として、UL-MU-MIMO送信を行う場合には、UL-MU-MIMO送信された信号を受信部103で受信し、各無線端末との間の伝搬路情報に基づきMIMO復調を行うことで、無線端末ごとのデータフレームに分離する。分離したデータフレームは制御部101に送る。なお、図示の例では受信部を1つ設けているが、複数の受信部を配置し、受信部ごとに1つのアンテナが、対応する送信部と共通に接続されてもよい。
When UL-MU-MIMO transmission is performed as UL-MU transmission, a signal transmitted by UL-MU-MIMO is received by the receiving unit 103, and MIMO demodulation is performed based on propagation path information with each wireless terminal. By doing so, it is separated into data frames for each wireless terminal. The separated data frame is sent to the control unit 101. In the illustrated example, one receiving unit is provided, but a plurality of receiving units may be arranged, and one antenna may be commonly connected to the corresponding transmitting unit for each receiving unit.
UL-MU送信として、UL-OFDAMU(チャネルベースのUL-OFDM(MU-MC)またはリソースユニットベースのUL-OFDMA)を行う場合には、送信された信号を受信部103で受信し、受信した信号から無線端末毎のチャネルまたは無線端末毎のリソースユニットの信号成分を抽出して、復調等の処理を含む物理層の処理を行うことで、無線端末毎のデータフレームを取得する。取得したデータフレームは制御部101に送る。制御部101は、送信部102および受信部103における送信フィルタおよび受信フィルタの各帯域を制御する機能を有する。
When performing UL-OFDAMU (channel-based UL-OFDM (MU-MC) or resource unit-based UL-OFDMA) as UL-MU transmission, the received signal is received by the receiving unit 103 and received. A data frame for each wireless terminal is obtained by extracting a channel component for each wireless terminal or a signal component of a resource unit for each wireless terminal from the signal and performing physical layer processing including processing such as demodulation. The acquired data frame is sent to the control unit 101. The control unit 101 has a function of controlling each band of the transmission filter and the reception filter in the transmission unit 102 and the reception unit 103.
なお、制御部101は、各無線端末に通知する情報、または各無線端末から通知された情報、またはこれらの両方を格納するための記憶装置にアクセスして当該情報を読み出してもよい。記憶装置は、内部メモリでも、外部メモリでもよく、揮発性メモリでも不揮発メモリでもよい。また、記憶装置は、メモリ以外に、SSD、ハードディスク等でもよい。
Note that the control unit 101 may read information by accessing a storage device that stores information notified to each wireless terminal, information notified from each wireless terminal, or both. The storage device may be an internal memory or an external memory, and may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory. In addition to the memory, the storage device may be an SSD, a hard disk, or the like.
上述した、制御部101と送信部102の処理の切り分けは一例であり、上述した形態とは別の形態も可能である。例えばデジタル領域の処理およびDA変換までは、制御部101で行い、DA変換より後の処理を、送信部102で行うようにしてもよい。制御部101と受信部103の処理の切り分けも同様に、AD変換より前までの処理を、受信部103で行い、AD変換後の処理を含むデジタル領域の処理を、制御部101で行うようにしてもよい。一例として、本実施形態に係るベースバンド集積回路は、制御部101と、送信部102における物理層の処理を行う部分およびDA変換を行う部分と、受信部103におけるAD変換以降の処理を行う部分とに対応し、RF集積回路は、送信部102におけるDA変換より後の処理を行う部分と、受信部103におけるAD変換より前の処理を行う部分に対応する。本実施形態に係る無線通信用集積回路は、ベースバンド集積回路およびRF集積回路のうち、少なくともベースバンド集積回路を含む。ここで述べた以外の方法でブロック間の処理、あるいはベースバンド集積回路およびRF集積回路間の処理を切り分けてもよい。
The above-described separation of the processing of the control unit 101 and the transmission unit 102 is an example, and a mode different from the above-described mode is possible. For example, processing up to the digital domain and DA conversion may be performed by the control unit 101, and processing after DA conversion may be performed by the transmission unit 102. Similarly, the processing between the control unit 101 and the reception unit 103 is performed by the reception unit 103 before the AD conversion, and the control unit 101 performs the processing of the digital area including the processing after the AD conversion. May be. As an example, the baseband integrated circuit according to the present embodiment includes a control unit 101, a part that performs physical layer processing in the transmission unit 102, a part that performs DA conversion, and a part that performs processing after AD conversion in the reception unit 103. The RF integrated circuit corresponds to a part that performs processing after DA conversion in the transmission unit 102 and a part that performs processing before AD conversion in the reception unit 103. The integrated circuit for wireless communication according to this embodiment includes at least a baseband integrated circuit among a baseband integrated circuit and an RF integrated circuit. Processing between blocks or processing between the baseband integrated circuit and the RF integrated circuit may be separated by a method other than that described here.
図8は、無線端末1に搭載される無線通信装置の機能ブロック図である。無線端末2~4に搭載される無線通信装置は、無線端末1と同様の構成を有するため、説明を省略する。
FIG. 8 is a functional block diagram of a wireless communication device mounted on the wireless terminal 1. The wireless communication devices mounted on the wireless terminals 2 to 4 have the same configuration as that of the wireless terminal 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
図8の無線通信装置は、制御部201と、送信部202と、受信部203と、アンテナ1Aと、バッファ204とを備えている。制御部201は、アクセスポイント11との通信を制御する制御部またはベースバンド集積回路に対応し、送信部202と受信部203は、一例として、フレームを送受信する無線通信部またはRF集積回路を形成する。制御部201の処理、および送信部202と受信部203のデジタル領域の処理の全部または一部は、CPU等のプロセッサで動作するソフトウェア(プログラム)によって行われてもよいし、ハードウェアによって行われてもよいし、これらのソフトウェアとハードウェアの両方によって行われてもよい。端末は、制御部201、送信部202および受信部203の全部または一部の処理を行うプロセッサを備えてもよい。
8 includes a control unit 201, a transmission unit 202, a reception unit 203, an antenna 1A, and a buffer 204. The control unit 201 corresponds to a control unit or a baseband integrated circuit that controls communication with the access point 11, and the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203 form, as an example, a wireless communication unit or an RF integrated circuit that transmits and receives frames. To do. All or part of the processing of the control unit 201 and the processing of the digital area of the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203 may be performed by software (program) that operates on a processor such as a CPU, or by hardware. It may be performed by both of these software and hardware. The terminal may include a processor that performs processing of all or part of the control unit 201, the transmission unit 202, and the reception unit 203.
バッファ204は、上位層と制御部201との間で、データを受け渡しするための記憶部である。上位層は、他の無線端末、アクセスポイント11、または他のネットワーク上の装置に送信するデータを生成して、バッファ204に格納したり、無線端末側のネットワークから受信したフレームのデータを、バッファ201を介して受け取ったりする。上位層は、TCP/IPやUDP/IPなど、MAC層の上位の通信処理を行ってもよいし、さらに、データを処理するアプリケーション層の処理を行ってもよい。上位層の処理は、CPU等のプロセッサで動作するソフトウェア(プログラム)によって行われてもよいし、ハードウェアによって行われてもよいし、ソフトウェアとハードウェアの両方によって行われてもよい。
The buffer 204 is a storage unit for transferring data between the upper layer and the control unit 201. The upper layer generates data to be transmitted to another wireless terminal, the access point 11, or a device on another network, and stores the data in the buffer 204 or receives frame data received from the network on the wireless terminal side as a buffer. Or via 201. The upper layer may perform communication processing above the MAC layer such as TCP / IP and UDP / IP, and may further perform processing of an application layer that processes data. The upper layer processing may be performed by software (program) that operates on a processor such as a CPU, may be performed by hardware, or may be performed by both software and hardware.
制御部201は、主としてMAC層の処理を行う。制御部201は、送信部202および受信部203を介して、アクセスポイント11とフレームを送受信することで、アクセスポイント11との通信を制御する。制御部201は、例えばアクセスポイント11から定期的に送信されるビーコンフレームを、アンテナ1Aおよび受信部203を介して受信する。制御部201は、クロック生成部を含んでもよい。また制御部201は外部からクロックが入力されるように構成されてもよい。クロックによって制御部201は内部時間を管理してもよい。クロック生成部で作ったクロックを外部に出力してもよい。
The control unit 201 mainly performs MAC layer processing. The control unit 201 controls communication with the access point 11 by transmitting and receiving frames to and from the access point 11 via the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203. The control unit 201 receives a beacon frame periodically transmitted from the access point 11, for example, via the antenna 1A and the reception unit 203. The control unit 201 may include a clock generation unit. The control unit 201 may be configured to receive a clock from the outside. The control unit 201 may manage the internal time by the clock. The clock generated by the clock generation unit may be output to the outside.
制御部201は、一例としてビーコンフレームを受信してアクセスポイント11にアソシエーション要求を行い、必要に応じて認証等のプロセスを経て、当該アクセスポイント11と無線リンクを確立する。
As an example, the control unit 201 receives a beacon frame, makes an association request to the access point 11, and establishes a wireless link with the access point 11 through a process such as authentication as necessary.
制御部201は、アップリンク送信用のデータが発生した場合、UL-MU送信のための要求フレーム(トリガ要求フレーム)を生成し、アクセスポイントに送信する。要求フレームの送信のために、まずDIFSおよびランダムに決定したバックオフ時間の間、キャリアセンスを行い、キャリアセンス結果に応じて送信権を獲得し、TXOPの間に、要求フレームを送信する。要求フレームには、自装置の識別子、データサイズ、許容遅延等の情報をデータフィールドに含めてもよい。
When the data for uplink transmission occurs, the control unit 201 generates a request frame (trigger request frame) for UL-MU transmission and transmits it to the access point. In order to transmit a request frame, first, carrier sense is performed during DIFS and a randomly determined backoff time, a transmission right is acquired according to the carrier sense result, and a request frame is transmitted during TXOP. The request frame may include information such as the identifier of the own device, the data size, and the allowable delay in the data field.
送信部202は、制御部201から入力されたフレームに物理ヘッダの付加や変調処理など、所望の物理層の処理を行う。また、物理層の処理後のフレームに対して、DA変換や、所望帯域の信号成分を抽出するフィルタ処理、周波数変換(アップコンバート)を行う。送信部202は、周波数変換された信号を増幅して、アンテナから空間に電波として放射する。
The transmission unit 202 performs processing of a desired physical layer such as addition of a physical header or modulation processing on the frame input from the control unit 201. Further, DA conversion, filter processing for extracting a signal component in a desired band, and frequency conversion (up-conversion) are performed on the frame after processing in the physical layer. The transmitting unit 202 amplifies the frequency-converted signal and radiates it as a radio wave from the antenna to the space.
アンテナ1Aで受信された信号は、受信部203において処理される。例えば、アクセスポイント11から問い合わせフレーム、ポーリングフレームまたは通知フレーム等の信号が受信され、受信部203において処理される。すなわち、受信信号は、受信部203において増幅され、周波数変換(ダウンコンバート)され、ファイルタリング処理で所望帯域成分が抽出される。抽出された信号は、さらにAD変換や、復調等を含む物理層の処理を経て、制御部201にフレームが入力される。制御部201は、入力されたフレームを解析し、解析結果に応じて動作を行う。
The signal received by the antenna 1A is processed by the receiving unit 203. For example, a signal such as an inquiry frame, a polling frame, or a notification frame is received from the access point 11 and processed by the receiving unit 203. That is, the received signal is amplified by the receiving unit 203, subjected to frequency conversion (down-conversion), and a desired band component is extracted by the filering process. The extracted signal is further subjected to physical layer processing including AD conversion and demodulation, and a frame is input to the control unit 201. The control unit 201 analyzes the input frame and performs an operation according to the analysis result.
例えば、制御部201は、アクセスポイント11から問い合わせフレームを受信した場合、先頭の端末情報フィールドに自装置の識別子が設定されているかを検査する。先頭の端末情報フィールドに自装置の識別子が設定されている場合は、バッファ204の状態に基づき、アップリンク送信用のデータの有無や、データサイズ等を確認して、要求フレームを生成する。制御部201は、生成した要求フレームを、問い合わせフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に送信する。先頭の端末情報フィールドに自装置の識別子が設定されていない場合は、2番目以降の端末情報フィールドに自装置の識別子が設定されているかを検査し、自装置の識別子が設定されている場合は、ポーリングフレームの受信待ちを行う。
For example, when the control unit 201 receives an inquiry frame from the access point 11, it checks whether the identifier of the own device is set in the head terminal information field. When the identifier of the own device is set in the first terminal information field, the request frame is generated by checking the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, etc. based on the state of the buffer 204. The control unit 201 transmits the generated request frame after SIFS from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame. If the identifier of the own device is not set in the first terminal information field, it is checked whether the identifier of the own device is set in the second and subsequent terminal information fields, and if the identifier of the own device is set Wait for polling frame reception.
制御部201は、アクセスポイント11からポーリングフレームを受信した場合、バッファ205の状態に基づき、アップリンク送信用のデータの有無や、データサイズ等を確認して、要求フレームを生成する。制御部201は、生成した要求フレームを、問い合わせフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に送信する。
When the control unit 201 receives a polling frame from the access point 11, the control unit 201 checks the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, and the like based on the state of the buffer 205, and generates a request frame. The control unit 201 transmits the generated request frame after SIFS from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame.
また、制御部201は、アクセスポイント11から通知フレームを受信した場合、自装置がUL-MU送信の対象端末として指定されているか否かを確認する。具体的に、各端末情報フィールドのいずれかに自装置の識別子が設定されているかを確認し、設定されている場合は、自装置が、自装置がUL-MU送信の対象端末として指定されていると判断する。この場合、バッファ204からデータを読み出して、データフレームを構築し、送信部202およびアンテナ1Aを介して、当該データフレームを送信する。この際、制御部201は、通知フレームの端末情報フィールドで指定されたパラメータ情報に基づいて送信するデータサイズまたは時間の長さ等を決定し、送信部202に対し、送信処理に必要なパラメータ情報を指定する。送信部202は、指定されたパラメータ情報を利用して物理層の処理を行う。制御部201は、通知フレームの受信完了からSIFS等、予め定められた時間後にデータフレームの送信を行い、これにより、通知フレームで指定された他の無線端末と同じタイミングでデータフレームが送信(UL-MU送信)される。制御部201は、送信部202および受信部203における送信フィルタおよび受信フィルタの各帯域を制御する機能を有する。
Further, when the control unit 201 receives the notification frame from the access point 11, it checks whether or not the own device is designated as a UL-MU transmission target terminal. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the identifier of the own device is set in any of the terminal information fields, and if it is set, the own device is designated as a target terminal for UL-MU transmission. Judge that In this case, data is read from the buffer 204, a data frame is constructed, and the data frame is transmitted via the transmission unit 202 and the antenna 1A. At this time, the control unit 201 determines the data size or time length to be transmitted based on the parameter information specified in the terminal information field of the notification frame, and sends parameter information necessary for transmission processing to the transmission unit 202. Is specified. The transmission unit 202 performs physical layer processing using the specified parameter information. The control unit 201 transmits a data frame after a predetermined time such as SIFS from the completion of reception of the notification frame, whereby the data frame is transmitted at the same timing as other wireless terminals specified in the notification frame (UL -MU transmission). The control unit 201 has a function of controlling each band of the transmission filter and the reception filter in the transmission unit 202 and the reception unit 203.
制御部201は、アクセスポイント11に通知する情報、またはアクセスポイント11から通知した情報、またはこれらの両方を格納するための記憶装置にアクセスして情報を読み出してもよい。記憶装置は、内部メモリでも、外部メモリでもよく、揮発性メモリでも不揮発メモリでもよい。また、記憶装置は、メモリ以外に、SSD、ハードディスク等でもよい。
The control unit 201 may read information by accessing a storage device for storing information notified to the access point 11, information notified from the access point 11, or both. The storage device may be an internal memory or an external memory, and may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory. In addition to the memory, the storage device may be an SSD, a hard disk, or the like.
上述した、制御部201と送信部202の処理の切り分けは一例であり、上述した形態とは別の形態も可能である。例えばデジタル領域の処理およびDA変換までは、制御部201で行い、DA変換より後の処理を、送信部202で行うようにしてもよい。制御部201と受信部203の処理の切り分けも同様に、AD変換より前までの処理を受信部203で行い、AD変換後の処理を含むデジタル領域の処理を、制御部201で行うようにしてもよい。一例として、本実施形態に係るベースバンド集積回路は、制御部201と、送信部202における物理層の処理を行う部分およびDA変換を行う部分と、受信部203におけるAD変換以降の処理を行う部分とに対応し、RF集積回路は、送信部202におけるDA変換より後の処理を行う部分と、受信部203におけるAD変換より前の処理を行う部分に対応する。本実施形態に係る無線通信用集積回路は、ベースバンド集積回路およびRF集積回路のうち、少なくともベースバンド集積回路を含む。ここで述べた以外の方法でブロック間の処理、あるいはベースバンド集積回路およびRF集積回路間の処理を切り分けてもよい。
The above-described separation of the processing of the control unit 201 and the transmission unit 202 is an example, and a mode different from the above-described mode is possible. For example, processing up to the digital domain and DA conversion may be performed by the control unit 201, and processing after DA conversion may be performed by the transmission unit 202. Similarly, the processing of the control unit 201 and the reception unit 203 is performed by the reception unit 203 performing processing before AD conversion, and the control unit 201 performs processing of the digital area including processing after AD conversion. Also good. As an example, the baseband integrated circuit according to this embodiment includes a control unit 201, a part that performs physical layer processing in the transmission unit 202, a part that performs DA conversion, and a part that performs processing after AD conversion in the reception unit 203. The RF integrated circuit corresponds to a part that performs processing after DA conversion in the transmission unit 202 and a part that performs processing before AD conversion in the reception unit 203. The integrated circuit for wireless communication according to this embodiment includes at least a baseband integrated circuit among a baseband integrated circuit and an RF integrated circuit. Processing between blocks or processing between the baseband integrated circuit and the RF integrated circuit may be separated by a method other than that described here.
図9は、第1の実施形態に係るアクセスポイントの動作例のフローチャートである。
FIG. 9 is a flowchart of an operation example of the access point according to the first embodiment.
アクセスポイント11は、アクセスポイントに接続している任意の無線端末(トリガ端末)から要求フレームを受信すると、UL-MU送信の実行を決定する(S101)。アクセスポイント11は、接続中の無線端末のうち、UL-MU送信に対応し、かつトリガ端末以外の中から、アップリンク送信用のデータを有するかを問い合わせる無線端末(送信端末候補)を選択する。そして、選択した無線端末の識別子等をそれぞれの端末情報フィールドに設定するなどして問い合わせフレームを生成する(S102)。アクセスポイント11は、生成した問い合わせフレームを、要求フレームの受信完了からSIFS後に送信する(同S102)。
When the access point 11 receives a request frame from an arbitrary wireless terminal (trigger terminal) connected to the access point, the access point 11 determines to execute UL-MU transmission (S101). The access point 11 selects a wireless terminal (transmission terminal candidate) that inquires whether it has data for uplink transmission from among the connected wireless terminals that support UL-MU transmission and that have data for uplink transmission. . Then, an inquiry frame is generated by setting the identifier or the like of the selected wireless terminal in each terminal information field (S102). The access point 11 transmits the generated inquiry frame after SIFS from the completion of receiving the request frame (S102).
アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームの先頭の端末情報フィールドで指定した無線端末から要求フレームを待ち受け、当該要求フレームを受信および解析する(S103)。アクセスポイントは、2番目の端末情報フィールドで指定された無線端末に対し、ポーリングフレームの送信と、当該無線端末からの要求フレームの受信および解析を行う。3番目以降の端末情報フィールドで指定された無線端末についても同様に、ポーリングフレームの送信と、要求フレームの受信および解析とを順次行う(S104)。なお、途中で、予め定めた条件が成立した場合、例えば問い合わせフレームの送信完了後から、一定時間が経過した場合は、募集期間を終了してもよい。すなわち、要求フレームの収集処理(ポーリングフレームの送信と、それに対する応答としての要求フレームの受信)を打ち切ってもよい。
The access point waits for a request frame from the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the head of the inquiry frame, and receives and analyzes the request frame (S103). The access point transmits a polling frame to the wireless terminal specified in the second terminal information field, and receives and analyzes a request frame from the wireless terminal. Similarly, for the wireless terminals specified in the third and subsequent terminal information fields, transmission of polling frames and reception and analysis of request frames are sequentially performed (S104). Note that the recruitment period may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied midway, for example, when a certain period of time has elapsed after completion of transmission of the inquiry frame. That is, the request frame collection process (transmitting a polling frame and receiving a request frame as a response thereto) may be aborted.
アクセスポイント11は、トリガ端末、およびポーリングフレームに対して要求フレームを送信した無線端末の中から、UL-MU送信の対象端末(対象装置)を選択する(S105)。アクセスポイント11は、選択した無線端末の識別子およびUL-MU送信用のパラメータ情報をそれぞれ端末情報フィールドに設定した通知フレームを生成し、生成した通知フレームを送信する(同S105)。アクセスポイント11は、通知フレームの送信完了からSIFS後に、通知フレームで指定した各無線端末から同時に送信(チャネルベースのUL-OFDMA(MU-MC)またはリソースユニットベースのUL-OFDMA、あるいはUL-MU-MIMO)される信号を受信し、受信信号に対し、復調等を含む物理層の処理を行って、各無線端末のデータフレームを取得する(S106)。
The access point 11 selects the UL-MU transmission target terminal (target apparatus) from the trigger terminal and the wireless terminal that has transmitted the request frame to the polling frame (S105). The access point 11 generates a notification frame in which the identifier of the selected wireless terminal and the parameter information for UL-MU transmission are set in the terminal information field, and transmits the generated notification frame (S105). The access point 11 transmits simultaneously from each wireless terminal specified in the notification frame after completion of transmission of the notification frame (channel-based UL-OFDMA (MU-MC), resource unit-based UL-OFDMA, or UL-MU). -The received signal is subjected to physical layer processing including demodulation and the like, and a data frame of each wireless terminal is obtained (S106).
図10は、本実施形態に係る無線端末の動作例を示すフローチャートである。ここでは無線端末がトリガ端末ではなく、問い合わせフレームで指定される無線端末である場合の動作例を示す。
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the wireless terminal according to the present embodiment. Here, an operation example in the case where the wireless terminal is not a trigger terminal but a wireless terminal specified by an inquiry frame is shown.
無線端末は、アクセスポイント11から問い合わせフレームを受信すると(S201)、自装置が先頭の端末情報フィールドで指定されているか、すなわち、先頭の端末情報フィールドに自装置の識別子が設定されているかを検査する(S202)。先頭の端末情報フィールドで自装置が指定されている場合は(YES)、アップリンク送信用のデータの有無や、データサイズ等を確認して、要求フレームを生成し、問い合わせフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に、アクセスポイント11に要求フレームを送信する(S203)。
When the wireless terminal receives the inquiry frame from the access point 11 (S201), the wireless terminal checks whether its own device is specified in the first terminal information field, that is, whether its own identifier is set in the first terminal information field. (S202). If the own device is specified in the first terminal information field (YES), the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, etc. are confirmed, a request frame is generated, and the SIFS is received after the reception of the inquiry frame is completed. Later, a request frame is transmitted to the access point 11 (S203).
先頭の端末情報フィールドで自装置が指定されていない場合は(S202のNO)、2番目以降の端末情報フィールドで自装置が指定されているかを検査し(S204)、2番目以降の端末情報フィールドで指定されている場合は(YES)、ポーリングフレームの受信を待機する。自装置宛のポーリングフレームを受信すると(S205)、アップリンク送信用のデータの有無や、データサイズ等を確認して、要求フレームを生成し、ポーリングフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に、アクセスポイント11に要求フレームを送信する(S206)。2番目以降の端末情報フィールドで自装置が指定されていない場合(S204のNO)、今回のUL-MU送信の対象候補から外れたと判断し、本フローの動作を終了する。
When the own device is not specified in the first terminal information field (NO in S202), it is checked whether the own device is specified in the second and subsequent terminal information fields (S204), and the second and subsequent terminal information fields. If specified in (YES), the reception of a polling frame is awaited. When a polling frame addressed to the own apparatus is received (S205), the presence / absence of data for uplink transmission, the data size, and the like are confirmed, a request frame is generated, and the access point 11 is sent to the access point 11 after SIFS from completion of reception of the polling frame. A request frame is transmitted (S206). If the own device is not specified in the second and subsequent terminal information fields (NO in S204), it is determined that the device has been excluded from the candidates for the current UL-MU transmission, and the operation of this flow is terminated.
無線端末は、ステップS203またはステップS206で要求フレームを送信した後、アクセスポイント11から通知フレームの到来を待機し、通知フレームを受信したら(S207)、自装置がUL-MU送信の対象端末として指定されているか否かを確認する(S208)。具体的に、自装置の識別子が通知フレーム内の端末情報フィールドのいずれかに設定されているかを確認する。自装置が指定されている場合(YES)、無線端末は、通知フレームにおける自装置用の端末情報フィールドで指定されたパラメータ情報に基づいて、データフレームを生成し、当該データフレームを、通知フレームの受信完了からSIFS等の一定時間後に送信する(S209)。なお、事前にアクセスポイントからパラメータ情報が指定されている場合には、通知フレームでのパラメータ情報の通知を省略することも可能である。ただし、UL-MU-MIMOの場合は、先に少し述べたように、物理パケットのヘッダ生成のため、他の無線端末のパラメータ情報の通知も事前に受けておく必要がある。一方、通知フレームで自装置が指定されていない場合は(S208のNO)、今回のUL-MU送信の対象端末から外れたと判断し、本フローの動作を終了する。
After transmitting the request frame in step S203 or step S206, the wireless terminal waits for the arrival of the notification frame from the access point 11 and receives the notification frame (S207). Then, the wireless terminal is designated as the UL-MU transmission target terminal. It is confirmed whether it has been done (S208). Specifically, it is confirmed whether the identifier of the own device is set in any of the terminal information fields in the notification frame. When the own device is designated (YES), the wireless terminal generates a data frame based on the parameter information designated in the terminal information field for the own device in the notification frame, and the data frame is changed to the notification frame. It transmits after a certain time such as SIFS from the completion of reception (S209). When parameter information is designated in advance from an access point, it is possible to omit notification of parameter information in a notification frame. However, in the case of UL-MU-MIMO, as described above, it is necessary to receive notification of parameter information of other wireless terminals in advance in order to generate a header of a physical packet. On the other hand, if the own device is not specified in the notification frame (NO in S208), it is determined that the device has been excluded from the target terminal of the current UL-MU transmission, and the operation of this flow is terminated.
以上、本実施形態によれば、アクセスポイントは、無線端末(トリガ端末)からデータ送信の許可を要求する要求フレームを受信したら、トリガ端末以外の1つまたは複数の無線端末を指定した問い合わせフレームを送信し、指定した無線端末から要求フレームを収集する。そして、トリガ端末、および指定した無線端末から受信した要求フレームに基づき、UL-MU送信のスケジューリング(UL-MU送信を行わせる無線端末の選定、送信用のパラメータ情報(アップリンク送信を行うデータサイズや変調・符号化方式など)の決定等)を行う。これにより、送信データを有する無線端末を少なくとも1台は確保できるとともに、各無線端末の要求も考慮することができ、効率的なUL-MU送信のスケジューリングが可能となる。また、問い合わせフレームの先頭の端末情報フィールドで指定した無線端末には、応答として要求フレームを送信させるようにしたため、ポーリングフレームの送信を行うことなく、よって、その分のオーバーヘッドを低減することができる。このように、アップリンクマルチユーザ送信のスケジューリングを、少ないオーバーヘッドで効率的に行うことができる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the access point receives a request frame requesting permission for data transmission from the wireless terminal (trigger terminal), the access point transmits an inquiry frame specifying one or more wireless terminals other than the trigger terminal. Transmit and collect request frames from the specified wireless terminal. Then, based on the request frame received from the trigger terminal and the designated wireless terminal, scheduling of UL-MU transmission (selection of a wireless terminal that performs UL-MU transmission, parameter information for transmission (data size for performing uplink transmission) And modulation / coding schemes). As a result, at least one wireless terminal having transmission data can be secured, and the request of each wireless terminal can be taken into account, thereby enabling efficient UL-MU transmission scheduling. Further, since the request frame is transmitted as a response to the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the head of the inquiry frame, the overhead can be reduced without transmitting the polling frame. . In this way, scheduling of uplink multiuser transmission can be performed efficiently with little overhead.
(第2の実施形態)
第1の実施形態では、アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームの送信後、問い合わせフレームで指定した2番目以降の無線端末にポーリングフレームを順次、送信することで、要求フレームを収集したが、ポーリングフレームの送信を行うことなく、要求フレームを取得する形態をここでは示す。 (Second Embodiment)
In the first embodiment, after transmitting the inquiry frame, the access point collects the request frames by sequentially transmitting the polling frames to the second and subsequent wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame. Here, a mode in which a request frame is acquired without performing the above is shown.
第1の実施形態では、アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームの送信後、問い合わせフレームで指定した2番目以降の無線端末にポーリングフレームを順次、送信することで、要求フレームを収集したが、ポーリングフレームの送信を行うことなく、要求フレームを取得する形態をここでは示す。 (Second Embodiment)
In the first embodiment, after transmitting the inquiry frame, the access point collects the request frames by sequentially transmitting the polling frames to the second and subsequent wireless terminals specified by the inquiry frame. Here, a mode in which a request frame is acquired without performing the above is shown.
図11に、第2の実施形態に係る動作シーケンスの例を示す。図3と比較して理解できるように、アクセスポイント11は、問い合わせフレーム22Aの送信後は、ポーリングフレームを送信しない。問い合わせフレーム22Aで指定された各無線端末(図では無線端末2、3、4)は、それぞれ問い合わせフレーム22Aの受信完了から、問い合わせフレーム22Aで指定された時間だけ待機した後に、それぞれ要求フレーム23、24、27を送信する。
FIG. 11 shows an example of an operation sequence according to the second embodiment. As can be understood from the comparison with FIG. 3, the access point 11 does not transmit the polling frame after transmitting the inquiry frame 22A. Each wireless terminal ( wireless terminals 2, 3, 4 in the figure) designated by the inquiry frame 22A waits for the time designated by the inquiry frame 22A from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22A, respectively, and then receives the request frame 23, 24 and 27 are transmitted.
アクセスポイント11は、無線端末2に対しては問い合わせフレーム22Aの受信完了からSIFS後のタイミングを、要求フレーム23の送信タイミングとして指示する。無線端末3に対しては、問い合わせフレーム22Aの受信完了から、SIFSの2倍と、要求フレーム23の時間長とを加算した時間後のタイミングを、要求フレーム25の送信タイミングとして指示する。無線端末4に対しては問い合わせフレーム22Aの受信完了から、SIFSの3倍と要求フレーム23の時間長と要求フレーム25の時間長とを加算した時間後のタイミングを、要求フレーム27の送信タイミングとして指示する。要求フレーム23、25、27の時間長は、事前に定められており、それぞれ同じ長さであるため、このように事前に送信タイミングを指定可能である。
The access point 11 instructs the wireless terminal 2 the timing after SIFS from the completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22A as the transmission timing of the request frame 23. The wireless terminal 3 is instructed as the transmission timing of the request frame 25 after the completion of the reception of the inquiry frame 22A, after a time obtained by adding twice the SIFS and the time length of the request frame 23. For the wireless terminal 4, the transmission timing of the request frame 27 is the timing after the completion of reception of the inquiry frame 22 </ b> A after adding SIFS three times, the time length of the request frame 23, and the time length of the request frame 25. Instruct. Since the time lengths of the request frames 23, 25, and 27 are determined in advance and are the same length, the transmission timing can be designated in advance in this way.
各無線端末に送信タイミングを指定する具体的な方法として、無線端末毎の端末情報フィールドに、待機時間に関する情報を設定し、各無線端末は、自装置の端末情報フィールドから当該情報で指定される待機時間だけ待機する方法が考えられる。または、自装置の端末情報フィールドが先頭から何番目かに応じて、端末側で待機時間を算出してもよい。要求フレームの時間長が固定であり、問い合わせフレームと要求フレーム間、および要求フレーム間のフレーム間隔をSIFSに固定すれば、端末側でも待機時間を算出可能である。要求フレームのビットサイズが固定の場合、問い合わせフレームで要求フレームに適用するMCSを指定することでフレーム長が決まるため各無線端末で待機時間を算出可能である。
As a specific method for specifying the transmission timing for each wireless terminal, information related to the standby time is set in the terminal information field for each wireless terminal, and each wireless terminal is specified by the information from the terminal information field of its own device. A method of waiting for a waiting time can be considered. Alternatively, the waiting time may be calculated on the terminal side according to the number of the terminal information field of the own device from the top. The time length of the request frame is fixed, and if the frame interval between the inquiry frame and the request frame and between the request frames is fixed to SIFS, the waiting time can also be calculated on the terminal side. When the bit size of the request frame is fixed, since the frame length is determined by designating the MCS to be applied to the request frame in the inquiry frame, each wireless terminal can calculate the waiting time.
各無線端末が送信した要求フレームがアクセスポイント11で受信成功しない可能性もあるが、この場合は、その無線端末からは要求フレームを受信できなかったとして扱えばよい。つまり、その無線端末は、今回のUL-MU送信の対象端末から除外される。
The request frame transmitted by each wireless terminal may not be successfully received by the access point 11, but in this case, it may be handled that the request frame cannot be received from the wireless terminal. That is, the wireless terminal is excluded from the target terminals for the current UL-MU transmission.
以上、本実施形態によれば、問い合わせフレームの送信後にポーリングフレームの送信を行う必要がないため、第1の実施形態に比べて、UL-MU送信の実行決定から、UL-MU送信開始までのオーバーヘッドを、さらに低減することができる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to transmit a polling frame after transmitting an inquiry frame. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment, from the execution decision of UL-MU transmission to the start of UL-MU transmission. The overhead can be further reduced.
(第3の実施形態)
第1または2の実施形態では、問い合わせフレームで要求フレームを応答させる無線端末を指定するために、各端末情報フィールドで個々の無線端末を指定したが、別の方法として、個々の無線端末を指定するのではなく、無線端末のグループを指定する方法も可能である。 (Third embodiment)
In the first or second embodiment, each wireless terminal is specified in each terminal information field in order to specify the wireless terminal to which the request frame is responded in the inquiry frame. However, as another method, the individual wireless terminal is specified. Instead of this, a method of designating a group of wireless terminals is also possible.
第1または2の実施形態では、問い合わせフレームで要求フレームを応答させる無線端末を指定するために、各端末情報フィールドで個々の無線端末を指定したが、別の方法として、個々の無線端末を指定するのではなく、無線端末のグループを指定する方法も可能である。 (Third embodiment)
In the first or second embodiment, each wireless terminal is specified in each terminal information field in order to specify the wireless terminal to which the request frame is responded in the inquiry frame. However, as another method, the individual wireless terminal is specified. Instead of this, a method of designating a group of wireless terminals is also possible.
この場合、アクセスポイントは、事前にグルーピングを行って、無線端末のグループを1つまたは複数生成しておく。グルーピングのタイミングは、例えば、新たに無線端末とのアソシエーション処理を行うごとに行ってもよいし、定期的に行ってもよいし、その他のタイミングで行ってもよい。この際、同じ無線端末が、複数のグループに属すことを許容してもよい。グルーピングの方法は任意でよく、例えば、事前に各無線端末との伝搬路応答を把握している場合は、空間相関の小さい(干渉の小さい)無線端末を同じグループにまとめてもよい。アクセスポイントは、グルーピングの結果を表すグルーピング情報を、グルーピングの対象となった各無線端末に、事前に定義した管理フレームにより通知すればよい。
In this case, the access point performs grouping in advance to generate one or a plurality of groups of wireless terminals. The grouping timing may be performed, for example, every time a new association process with a wireless terminal is performed, may be performed periodically, or may be performed at other timing. At this time, the same wireless terminal may be allowed to belong to a plurality of groups. The grouping method may be arbitrary. For example, when the propagation path response with each wireless terminal is grasped in advance, wireless terminals with small spatial correlation (small interference) may be grouped into the same group. The access point may notify grouping information representing the result of grouping to each wireless terminal that is the target of grouping using a management frame defined in advance.
図12にグルーピング情報の例を示す。この例では、グルーピング情報はテーブル形式を有するが、リスト形式など、別の形態でもよい。各グループにはグループIDが割り当てられ、各行には、各グループに属する無線端末の識別子が設定されている。例えばグループIDが1のグループには、無線端末1~3(STA1~STA3)が属している。各無線端末に通知するグルーピング情報は、全グループに関する情報でもよいし、各無線端末が属するグループに関する情報のみでもよい。
Fig. 12 shows an example of grouping information. In this example, the grouping information has a table format, but may have another format such as a list format. A group ID is assigned to each group, and an identifier of a wireless terminal belonging to each group is set in each row. For example, wireless terminals 1 to 3 (STA1 to STA3) belong to a group having a group ID of 1. The grouping information notified to each wireless terminal may be information regarding all groups or only information regarding the group to which each wireless terminal belongs.
アクセスポイントは、トリガ要求フレームの受信に応じてUL-MU送信の実行を決定すると、事前に生成したグループ群から、対象となるグループを選択する。そして、選択したグループの識別子(グループID)を、問い合わせフレームのグループIDフィールドに設定する。当該グループIDのグループに属する個々の無線端末毎の端末情報フィールドは、個々の無線端末に個別に通知する情報がない場合は、省略してよい。なお、対象となるグループを指定する際、指定するグループには、最初の要求フレーム21を送信した無線端末1(トリガ端末)が属することを許容してもよい。この場合、無線端末1は、当該グループIDが設定された問い合わせフレーム22を受信しても、アクセスポイント11に対して何も行わないように動作すればよい。
When the access point decides to execute UL-MU transmission in response to the reception of the trigger request frame, the access point selects a target group from the group generated in advance. Then, the identifier (group ID) of the selected group is set in the group ID field of the inquiry frame. The terminal information field for each wireless terminal belonging to the group of the group ID may be omitted when there is no information to be notified individually to each wireless terminal. When a target group is specified, it may be allowed that the wireless terminal 1 (trigger terminal) that transmitted the first request frame 21 belongs to the specified group. In this case, the wireless terminal 1 may operate so as not to perform anything on the access point 11 even when the inquiry frame 22 in which the group ID is set is received.
第1または第2の実施形態では、問い合わせフレームに直接応答する無線端末は、所定位置の端末情報フィールド、具体的に先頭の端末情報フィールドに指定された無線端末であった。これに対し、本実施形態では、グルーピング情報で所定位置に記載された無線端末を、問い合わせフレームに直接応答する無線端末とする。
In the first or second embodiment, the wireless terminal that directly responds to the inquiry frame is the wireless terminal specified in the terminal information field at the predetermined position, specifically, the head terminal information field. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a wireless terminal described at a predetermined position in the grouping information is a wireless terminal that directly responds to the inquiry frame.
例えば図12のグルーピング情報で、テーブルの一番左側の列に記載された無線端末が、問い合わせフレームに応答する無線端末とする。換言すれば、テーブルの左側の列から右側の列へ向けて優先順位が低くなるように設定されており、最も優先順位が高い無線端末が、問い合わせフレームに応答する。左から2番目の列から右側へ向けて記載された無線端末(2番目以降の優先順位の無線端末)は、第1または第2の実施形態に準じて、要求フレームを送信する。すなわち、第1の実施形態に準じる場合は、アクセスポイントからポーリングフレームを受信した際に、応答として要求フレームを送信する。第2の実施形態に準じる場合は、問い合わせフレームで指定されたタイミングで要求フレームを送信する、もしくは、自装置が一番左の列から何番目に記載されているか(優先順位が何番か)に応じて決まるタイミングで要求フレームを送信する。ただし、指定するグループに、トリガ端末が属することを許容し、かつトリガ端末が属する場合は、トリガ端末の識別子を問い合わせフレームに設定し、問い合わせフレームで指定された無線端末(指定されたグループに属する端末のうちトリガ端末以外の端末)は、トリガ端末を除いて自装置の優先順位を判断すればよい。
For example, in the grouping information in FIG. 12, the wireless terminal described in the leftmost column of the table is a wireless terminal that responds to the inquiry frame. In other words, the priority is set so as to decrease from the left column to the right column of the table, and the wireless terminal with the highest priority responds to the inquiry frame. The wireless terminals described from the second column from the left to the right (second and subsequent priority wireless terminals) transmit a request frame according to the first or second embodiment. That is, in the case of conforming to the first embodiment, a request frame is transmitted as a response when a polling frame is received from an access point. In the case of conforming to the second embodiment, a request frame is transmitted at the timing specified in the inquiry frame, or what number is listed from the leftmost column of the own device (what is the priority) The request frame is transmitted at a timing determined according to the above. However, if the trigger terminal belongs to the specified group and the trigger terminal belongs, the identifier of the trigger terminal is set in the inquiry frame, and the wireless terminal specified in the inquiry frame (belongs to the specified group) Terminals other than the trigger terminal among the terminals may determine the priority order of their own devices except for the trigger terminal.
問い合わせフレームに直接応答する無線端末を指定する別の方法として、直接応答する無線端末の識別子を、グループIDに加えて、問い合わせフレームに設定してもよい。その場合、グループIDフィールドに加えて、直接応答する無線端末の識別子を設定する応答端末フィールドを、問い合わせフレームに定義すればよい。図14にグループIDフィールドと応答端末フィールドの例を示す。これらのフィールドは図4に示したMACフレームのデータ(Data)フィールドに配置されることができる。アクセスポイントは、選択したグループに属する無線端末の中から、直接応答する無線端末(トリガ端末を除く)を選択し、当該グループのグループIDと、選択した無線端末の識別子を、問い合わせフレームのグループIDフィールドおよび応答端末フィールドに設定する。問い合わせフレームを受信した無線端末は、自装置がグループIDフィールドに設定されたグループに属し、かつ応答端末フィールドに指定されている場合は、問い合わせフレームの受信完了からSIFS後に要求フレームを返すようにすればよい。自装置がグループIDフィールドに設定されたグループに属するが、応答端末フィールドに指定されていない場合は、上述した2番目以降の優先順位の無線端末と同様にして、要求フレームを送信すればよい。指定するグループに、トリガ端末が属することを許容し、かつトリガ端末が属する場合も上述した例に倣えばよい。
As another method for designating a wireless terminal that directly responds to the inquiry frame, the identifier of the wireless terminal that directly responds may be set in the inquiry frame in addition to the group ID. In this case, in addition to the group ID field, a response terminal field for setting an identifier of a wireless terminal that directly responds may be defined in the inquiry frame. FIG. 14 shows an example of the group ID field and the response terminal field. These fields can be arranged in the data field of the MAC frame shown in FIG. The access point selects a wireless terminal (excluding the trigger terminal) that directly responds from the wireless terminals belonging to the selected group, and sets the group ID of the group and the identifier of the selected wireless terminal to the group ID of the inquiry frame. Set in the field and response terminal field. If the wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame belongs to the group set in the group ID field and is specified in the response terminal field, the wireless terminal should return a request frame after SIFS from completion of reception of the inquiry frame. That's fine. If the own device belongs to the group set in the group ID field but is not specified in the response terminal field, the request frame may be transmitted in the same manner as the second and subsequent priority wireless terminals. When the trigger terminal is allowed to belong to the specified group and the trigger terminal belongs, the above-described example may be followed.
このように問い合わせフレームに、個々の無線端末の識別子を指定する代わりに、グループIDを指定することで、問い合わせフレームの長さを短くすることが可能になる。
In this way, the length of the inquiry frame can be shortened by specifying the group ID instead of specifying the identifier of each wireless terminal in the inquiry frame.
また、アクセスポイントは、UL-MU送信の対象端末として選択した無線端末に送信する通知フレームについても同様に、グループIDによって指定を行ってもよい。この場合、アクセスポイントは、UL-MU送信を許可するグループを選択し、選択したグループの識別子(グループID)を、通知フレームのグループIDフィールドに設定する。この際、各端末情報フィールドは、グループ内の優先順位に応じて左から順番に割り当てるとすれば、各端末情報フィールドへの無線端末の識別子の設定を省略して、無線端末の識別子以外のパラメータ情報等のみを設定してもよい。これにより、通知フレームのフレーム長を短くできる。なお、通知フレームで指定するグループに、要求フレームを取得していない無線端末が含まれることを許容してもよいし、指定するグループには、要求フレームを取得した無線端末のみが含まれるように、グループの選択を行ってもよい。
Also, the access point may specify the notification frame to be transmitted to the wireless terminal selected as the UL-MU transmission target terminal by the group ID in the same manner. In this case, the access point selects a group that permits UL-MU transmission, and sets the identifier (group ID) of the selected group in the group ID field of the notification frame. At this time, if each terminal information field is assigned in order from the left according to the priority in the group, setting of the identifier of the wireless terminal in each terminal information field is omitted, and parameters other than the identifier of the wireless terminal are set. Only information or the like may be set. Thereby, the frame length of the notification frame can be shortened. The group specified by the notification frame may be allowed to include wireless terminals that have not acquired the request frame, or the specified group may include only the wireless terminal that has acquired the request frame. A group may be selected.
(第4の実施形態)
第1~第3の実施形態では、アクセスポイントは、中央制御型のアクセス制御により、各無線端末から要求フレームを取得した。すなわち、アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームまたはポーリングフレームを送信することにより、対象とする無線端末に対して要求フレームを送信するよう制御した。これに対し、本実施形態では、各無線端末が分散制御型のアクセス制御、具体的にはCSMA/CAに従って、要求フレームを送信する形態を示す。 (Fourth embodiment)
In the first to third embodiments, the access point acquires a request frame from each wireless terminal by central control type access control. That is, the access point controls to transmit a request frame to the target wireless terminal by transmitting an inquiry frame or a polling frame. On the other hand, this embodiment shows a mode in which each wireless terminal transmits a request frame in accordance with distributed control access control, specifically, CSMA / CA.
第1~第3の実施形態では、アクセスポイントは、中央制御型のアクセス制御により、各無線端末から要求フレームを取得した。すなわち、アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームまたはポーリングフレームを送信することにより、対象とする無線端末に対して要求フレームを送信するよう制御した。これに対し、本実施形態では、各無線端末が分散制御型のアクセス制御、具体的にはCSMA/CAに従って、要求フレームを送信する形態を示す。 (Fourth embodiment)
In the first to third embodiments, the access point acquires a request frame from each wireless terminal by central control type access control. That is, the access point controls to transmit a request frame to the target wireless terminal by transmitting an inquiry frame or a polling frame. On the other hand, this embodiment shows a mode in which each wireless terminal transmits a request frame in accordance with distributed control access control, specifically, CSMA / CA.
図14に、第4の実施形態に係る動作シーケンスの例を示す。アクセスポイントが、第1または第2の実施形態と同様に、問い合わせフレーム22を送信する。問い合わせフレーム22を受信した無線端末は、自装置が問い合わせフレーム22で指定されているかを確認し、指定されている場合は、CSMA/CAに従って、要求フレームを送信する。アクセスポイントは、無線端末から受信した要求フレームを正常に受信した場合は、受信完了からSIFS後にACKフレームを返す。図14の例では、問い合わせフレーム22で無線端末2~4が指定されており、無線端末2が最初に送信権を獲得して要求フレーム23を送信し、それをアクセスポイントが正常に受信して、ACKフレーム41を返している。次に、無線端末3が送信権を獲得して、要求フレーム25を送信し、それをアクセスポイントが正常に受信して、ACKフレーム42を返している。無線端末4についても同様にして、無線端末4からの要求フレームの送信と、アクセスポイントからのACKフレームの送信が行われるが、図示は省略している。なお、無線端末は、送信した要求フレームに対するACKフレームを受信しない場合は、送信に失敗したとして、要求フレームを再送してもよい。なお、第1~第3の実施形態では、問い合わせフレーム22で指定された端末情報フィールドの位置によって(特に先頭か否かで)その後の動作が変化したが、本実施形態では、各無線端末は、どの端末情報フィールドに識別子が設定されても動作に影響は無い。
FIG. 14 shows an example of an operation sequence according to the fourth embodiment. The access point transmits the inquiry frame 22 as in the first or second embodiment. The wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame 22 checks whether its own device is specified in the inquiry frame 22, and if so, transmits a request frame in accordance with CSMA / CA. When the access point normally receives the request frame received from the wireless terminal, the access point returns an ACK frame after SIFS from completion of reception. In the example of FIG. 14, the wireless terminals 2 to 4 are specified in the inquiry frame 22, the wireless terminal 2 first obtains the transmission right and transmits the request frame 23, and the access point receives it normally. ACK frame 41 is returned. Next, the wireless terminal 3 acquires the transmission right, transmits the request frame 25, and the access point normally receives it and returns the ACK frame 42. Similarly, the wireless terminal 4 transmits a request frame from the wireless terminal 4 and an ACK frame from the access point, which is not shown. Note that if the wireless terminal does not receive the ACK frame for the transmitted request frame, the wireless terminal may retransmit the request frame assuming that the transmission has failed. In the first to third embodiments, the subsequent operation changes depending on the position of the terminal information field specified in the inquiry frame 22 (particularly depending on whether it is the head or not). In this embodiment, each wireless terminal No matter what terminal information field the identifier is set, the operation is not affected.
図14の動作例は、アクセスポイントが、要求フレームの受信に対して、ACKフレームを返したが、ACKフレームの送信を省略することも可能である。この場合の動作シーケンスの例を図15に示す。アクセスポイントは、無線端末2~4から要求フレーム23、25、27を受信するが、ACKフレームは返さない。これにより、無線端末が送信した要求フレームの到達性は保証できなくなるものの、募集期間を短縮化できる。
In the operation example of FIG. 14, the access point returns an ACK frame in response to reception of the request frame, but transmission of the ACK frame may be omitted. An example of the operation sequence in this case is shown in FIG. The access point receives the request frames 23, 25, and 27 from the wireless terminals 2 to 4, but does not return an ACK frame. As a result, the reachability of the request frame transmitted by the wireless terminal cannot be guaranteed, but the recruitment period can be shortened.
ここで、アクセスポイントは、予め定めた条件が成立したら、募集期間(要求フレームの収集処理)を終了してもよい。予め定めた条件として、問い合わせフレームの送信完了から所定の時間が経過したとき、または問い合わせフレームで指定したすべての無線端末から要求フレームを受信したときがある。この他、所定数の無線端末から要求フレームを受信したときがある。所定数として、例えば希望する多重数あるいは最大可能な多重数から、1を減算した値がある。1を減算したのは、トリガ端末を除くためである。アクセスポイントは、要求フレームを送信した無線端末の中から、UL-MU送信の対象端末を選択し、選択した無線端末を指定した通知フレーム28を送信する。
Here, the access point may end the recruitment period (request frame collection processing) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Predetermined conditions include when a predetermined time has elapsed since the completion of transmission of the inquiry frame, or when request frames have been received from all wireless terminals specified in the inquiry frame. In addition, there are times when request frames are received from a predetermined number of wireless terminals. As the predetermined number, for example, there is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the desired multiplexing number or the maximum possible multiplexing number. The reason why 1 is subtracted is to exclude the trigger terminal. The access point selects a UL-MU transmission target terminal from the wireless terminals that transmitted the request frame, and transmits a notification frame 28 designating the selected wireless terminal.
以上、本実施形態によれば、CSMA/CAに従って、要求フレームを送信するようにしたことにより、アクセスポイントの負荷を低減でき、またUL-MU送信開始までのオーバーヘッドを低減できる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the request frame is transmitted according to CSMA / CA, the load on the access point can be reduced, and the overhead until the UL-MU transmission start can be reduced.
(第5の実施形態)
第4の実施形態では、問い合わせフレームで指定された無線端末は、アップリンク送信用のデータの有無に拘わらず、要求フレームを送信することを想定していた。すなわち、アップリンク送信用のデータがない場合は、データサイズを0、または送信データ有無ビットをオフにした要求フレームを送信することを想定していた。このことは第1~第3の実施形態でも同様である。 (Fifth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the wireless terminal specified by the inquiry frame transmits a request frame regardless of the presence / absence of uplink transmission data. That is, when there is no data for uplink transmission, it is assumed that a request frame with a data size of 0 or a transmission data presence / absence bit turned off is transmitted. The same applies to the first to third embodiments.
第4の実施形態では、問い合わせフレームで指定された無線端末は、アップリンク送信用のデータの有無に拘わらず、要求フレームを送信することを想定していた。すなわち、アップリンク送信用のデータがない場合は、データサイズを0、または送信データ有無ビットをオフにした要求フレームを送信することを想定していた。このことは第1~第3の実施形態でも同様である。 (Fifth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the wireless terminal specified by the inquiry frame transmits a request frame regardless of the presence / absence of uplink transmission data. That is, when there is no data for uplink transmission, it is assumed that a request frame with a data size of 0 or a transmission data presence / absence bit turned off is transmitted. The same applies to the first to third embodiments.
本実施形態では、第4の実施形態と同じく、CSMA/CAに従って要求フレームを送信するシステムにおいて、アップリンク送信用のデータを有する場合にのみ、要求フレームを送信する。アクセスポイントは、第4の実施形態と同様にして、問い合わせフレームを生成および送信する。問い合わせフレームを受信した無線端末は、自装置が問い合わせフレームで指定されているかを確認し、自装置が指定されており、かつアップリンク送信用のデータを有するときは、CSMA/CAに従って要求フレームの送信を行う。自装置が指定されていても、アップリンク送信用のデータを有さないときは、要求フレームの送信は行わない。アクセスポイントは、第4の実施形態と同様、予め定めた条件が成立したら、募集期間(要求フレームの収集処理)を終了し、要求フレームを送信した無線端末の中から、UL-MU送信の対象端末を選択する。アクセスポイントは、選択した無線端末を指定した通知フレームを生成し、生成した通知フレームを送信する。
In the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, in a system that transmits a request frame in accordance with CSMA / CA, the request frame is transmitted only when uplink transmission data is included. The access point generates and transmits an inquiry frame in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment. The wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame confirms whether its own device is designated by the inquiry frame, and when the own device is designated and has data for uplink transmission, the wireless terminal transmits the request frame according to CSMA / CA. Send. Even if the own device is specified, if there is no data for uplink transmission, the request frame is not transmitted. As in the fourth embodiment, the access point terminates the recruitment period (request frame collection processing) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and selects the UL-MU transmission target from the wireless terminals that transmitted the request frame. Select a terminal. The access point generates a notification frame specifying the selected wireless terminal, and transmits the generated notification frame.
以上、本実施形態によれば、アップリンク送信用のデータを有する無線端末のみ、問い合わせフレームに対して要求フレームを返すようにしたことにより、帯域の使用効率が向上するとともに、UL-MU送信開始までのオーバーヘッドをより低減できる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, only the wireless terminal having data for uplink transmission returns the request frame in response to the inquiry frame, thereby improving the bandwidth usage efficiency and starting UL-MU transmission. Can be further reduced.
(第6の実施形態)
これまで説明した実施形態では、アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームで、要求フレームの送信を要求もしくは許可する無線端末を指定したが、接続済み(無線リンクを確立済み)のすべての無線端末を指定する場合は、無線端末の指定を明示的に行わないことも可能である。この場合、問い合わせフレームから端末情報フィールドを省略してもよい。各無線端末に共通に通知する情報がある場合は、問い合わせフレームに共通情報フィールドを追加して、そのフィールドで、各無線端末に共通に通知する情報を設定してもよい。 (Sixth embodiment)
In the embodiments described so far, the access point designates the wireless terminal that requests or permits transmission of the request frame in the inquiry frame, but designates all the wireless terminals that are already connected (wireless links have been established). It is also possible not to explicitly specify the wireless terminal. In this case, the terminal information field may be omitted from the inquiry frame. When there is information to be commonly notified to each wireless terminal, a common information field may be added to the inquiry frame, and information to be commonly notified to each wireless terminal may be set in the field.
これまで説明した実施形態では、アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームで、要求フレームの送信を要求もしくは許可する無線端末を指定したが、接続済み(無線リンクを確立済み)のすべての無線端末を指定する場合は、無線端末の指定を明示的に行わないことも可能である。この場合、問い合わせフレームから端末情報フィールドを省略してもよい。各無線端末に共通に通知する情報がある場合は、問い合わせフレームに共通情報フィールドを追加して、そのフィールドで、各無線端末に共通に通知する情報を設定してもよい。 (Sixth embodiment)
In the embodiments described so far, the access point designates the wireless terminal that requests or permits transmission of the request frame in the inquiry frame, but designates all the wireless terminals that are already connected (wireless links have been established). It is also possible not to explicitly specify the wireless terminal. In this case, the terminal information field may be omitted from the inquiry frame. When there is information to be commonly notified to each wireless terminal, a common information field may be added to the inquiry frame, and information to be commonly notified to each wireless terminal may be set in the field.
第5の実施形態をベースに、分散制御型のアクセス制御で要求フレームを送信する場合の動作例を示す。アクセスポイントは、受信先アドレスをブロードキャストアドレスまたはマルチキャストアドレスとした、問い合わせフレームを生成および送信する。この問い合わせフレームは、端末情報フィールドを有さなくてよい。問い合わせフレームを受信した無線端末は、アップリンク送信用のデータを有するかを確認し、アップリンク送信用のデータを有する場合は、CSMA/CAに従って、要求フレームを返す。アップリンク送信用のデータを有さない場合は、第4の実施形態と同様に要求フレームを返さなくてもよいし、第3の実施形態と同様に、要求フレームを返すようにしてもよい。アクセスポイントは、問い合わせフレームの送信完了後、予め定めた条件が終了した場合は、募集期間を終了する。アクセスポイントは、要求フレームを送信した無線端末(トリガ端末を含む)の中から、UL-MU送信の対象となる端末を選択して、通知フレームを生成および送信を行う。
An example of operation when a request frame is transmitted by distributed control type access control based on the fifth embodiment will be described. The access point generates and transmits an inquiry frame with a receiving address as a broadcast address or a multicast address. This inquiry frame may not have the terminal information field. The wireless terminal that has received the inquiry frame confirms whether it has data for uplink transmission, and if it has data for uplink transmission, returns a request frame according to CSMA / CA. When there is no data for uplink transmission, the request frame may not be returned as in the fourth embodiment, or the request frame may be returned as in the third embodiment. The access point ends the recruitment period when the predetermined condition ends after the transmission of the inquiry frame is completed. The access point selects a terminal that is a target of UL-MU transmission from the wireless terminals (including the trigger terminal) that transmitted the request frame, and generates and transmits a notification frame.
以上、本実施形態によれば、問い合わせフレームから端末情報フィールドを省略できるため、問い合わせフレームのフレーム長を短くできる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the terminal information field can be omitted from the inquiry frame, the frame length of the inquiry frame can be shortened.
(第7の実施形態)
図21は、端末(非アクセスポイントの端末)またはアクセスポイントの全体構成例を示したものである。この構成例は一例であり、本実施形態はこれに限定されるものではない。端末またはアクセスポイントは、1つまたは複数のアンテナ1~n(nは1以上の整数)と、無線LANモジュール148と、ホストシステム149を備える。無線LANモジュール148は、第1の実施形態に係る無線通信装置に対応する。無線LANモジュール148は、ホスト・インターフェースを備え、ホスト・インターフェースで、ホストシステム149と接続される。接続ケーブルを介してホストシステム149と接続される他、ホストシステム149と直接接続されてもよい。また、無線LANモジュール148が基板にはんだ等で実装され、基板の配線を介してホストシステム149と接続される構成も可能である。ホストシステム149は、任意の通信プロトコルに従って、無線LANモジュール148およびアンテナ1~nを用いて、外部の装置と通信を行う。通信プロトコルは、TCP/IPと、それより上位の層のプロトコルとを含んでもよい。または、TCP/IPは無線LANモジュール148に搭載し、ホストシステム149は、それより上位層のプロトコルのみを実行してもよい。この場合、ホストシステム149の構成を簡単化できる。本端末は、例えば、移動体端末、TV、デジタルカメラ、ウェアラブルデバイス、タブレット、スマートフォン、ゲーム装置、ネットワークストレージ装置、モニタ、デジタルオーディオプレーヤ、Webカメラ、ビデオカメラ、プロジェクト、ナビゲーションシステム、外部アダプタ、内部アダプタ、セットトップボックス、ゲートウェイ、プリンタサーバ、モバイルアクセスポイント、ルータ、エンタープライズ/サービスプロバイダアクセスポイント、ポータブル装置、ハンドヘルド装置等でもよい。 (Seventh embodiment)
FIG. 21 shows an example of the overall configuration of a terminal (non-access point terminal) or access point. This configuration example is an example, and the present embodiment is not limited to this. The terminal or access point includes one ormore antennas 1 to n (n is an integer of 1 or more), a wireless LAN module 148, and a host system 149. The wireless LAN module 148 corresponds to the wireless communication device according to the first embodiment. The wireless LAN module 148 includes a host interface, and is connected to the host system 149 through the host interface. In addition to being connected to the host system 149 via a connection cable, the host system 149 may be directly connected. In addition, a configuration in which the wireless LAN module 148 is mounted on a substrate with solder or the like and is connected to the host system 149 through wiring on the substrate is also possible. The host system 149 communicates with an external device using the wireless LAN module 148 and the antennas 1 to n according to an arbitrary communication protocol. The communication protocol may include TCP / IP and higher layer protocols. Alternatively, TCP / IP may be installed in the wireless LAN module 148, and the host system 149 may execute only higher-layer protocols. In this case, the configuration of the host system 149 can be simplified. This terminal is, for example, a mobile terminal, TV, digital camera, wearable device, tablet, smartphone, game device, network storage device, monitor, digital audio player, web camera, video camera, project, navigation system, external adapter, internal It may be an adapter, set top box, gateway, printer server, mobile access point, router, enterprise / service provider access point, portable device, handheld device, and the like.
図21は、端末(非アクセスポイントの端末)またはアクセスポイントの全体構成例を示したものである。この構成例は一例であり、本実施形態はこれに限定されるものではない。端末またはアクセスポイントは、1つまたは複数のアンテナ1~n(nは1以上の整数)と、無線LANモジュール148と、ホストシステム149を備える。無線LANモジュール148は、第1の実施形態に係る無線通信装置に対応する。無線LANモジュール148は、ホスト・インターフェースを備え、ホスト・インターフェースで、ホストシステム149と接続される。接続ケーブルを介してホストシステム149と接続される他、ホストシステム149と直接接続されてもよい。また、無線LANモジュール148が基板にはんだ等で実装され、基板の配線を介してホストシステム149と接続される構成も可能である。ホストシステム149は、任意の通信プロトコルに従って、無線LANモジュール148およびアンテナ1~nを用いて、外部の装置と通信を行う。通信プロトコルは、TCP/IPと、それより上位の層のプロトコルとを含んでもよい。または、TCP/IPは無線LANモジュール148に搭載し、ホストシステム149は、それより上位層のプロトコルのみを実行してもよい。この場合、ホストシステム149の構成を簡単化できる。本端末は、例えば、移動体端末、TV、デジタルカメラ、ウェアラブルデバイス、タブレット、スマートフォン、ゲーム装置、ネットワークストレージ装置、モニタ、デジタルオーディオプレーヤ、Webカメラ、ビデオカメラ、プロジェクト、ナビゲーションシステム、外部アダプタ、内部アダプタ、セットトップボックス、ゲートウェイ、プリンタサーバ、モバイルアクセスポイント、ルータ、エンタープライズ/サービスプロバイダアクセスポイント、ポータブル装置、ハンドヘルド装置等でもよい。 (Seventh embodiment)
FIG. 21 shows an example of the overall configuration of a terminal (non-access point terminal) or access point. This configuration example is an example, and the present embodiment is not limited to this. The terminal or access point includes one or
図22は、無線LANモジュールのハードウェア構成例を示す。この構成は、無線通信装置が非アクセスポイントの端末およびアクセスポイントのいずれに搭載される場合にも適用可能である。つまり、図11または図12に示した無線通信装置の具体的な構成の一例として適用できる。この構成例では、アンテナは1本のみであるが、2本以上のアンテナを備えていてもよい。この場合、各アンテナに対応して、送信系統(216、222~225)、受信系統(232~235)、PLL242、水晶発振器(基準信号源)243およびスイッチ245のセットが複数配置され、各セットがそれぞれ制御回路212に接続されてもよい。
FIG. 22 shows a hardware configuration example of the wireless LAN module. This configuration can also be applied when the wireless communication apparatus is mounted on either a non-access point terminal or an access point. That is, it can be applied as an example of a specific configuration of the wireless communication apparatus illustrated in FIG. In this configuration example, there is only one antenna, but two or more antennas may be provided. In this case, a plurality of sets of a transmission system (216, 222 to 225), a reception system (232 to 235), a PLL 242, a crystal oscillator (reference signal source) 243, and a switch 245 are arranged corresponding to each antenna. May be connected to the control circuit 212, respectively.
無線LANモジュール(無線通信装置)は、ベースバンドIC(Integrated Circuit)211と、RF(Radio Frequency)IC221と、バラン225と、スイッチ245と、アンテナ247とを備える。
The wireless LAN module (wireless communication device) includes a baseband IC (Integrated Circuit) 211, an RF (Radio Frequency) IC 221, a balun 225, a switch 245, and an antenna 247.
ベースバンドIC211は、ベースバンド回路(制御回路)212、メモリ213、ホスト・インターフェース214、CPU215、DAC(Digital to Analog Conveter)216、およびADC(Analog to Digital Converter)217を備える。
The baseband IC 211 includes a baseband circuit (control circuit) 212, a memory 213, a host interface 214, a CPU 215, a DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) 216, and an ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) 217.
ベースバンドIC211とRF IC221は同じ基板上に形成されてもよい。また、ベースバンドIC211とRF IC221は1チップで構成されてもよい。DAC216およびADC217の両方またはいずれか一方が、RF IC221に配置されてもよいし、別のICに配置されてもよい。またメモリ213およびCPU215の両方またはいずれか一方が、ベースバンドICとは別のICに配置されてもよい。
The baseband IC 211 and the RF IC 221 may be formed on the same substrate. Further, the baseband IC 211 and the RF IC 221 may be configured by one chip. Either or either of the DAC 216 and the ADC 217 may be arranged in the RF IC 221 or may be arranged in another IC. Further, both or either of the memory 213 and the CPU 215 may be arranged in an IC different from the baseband IC.
メモリ213は、ホストシステムとの間で受け渡しするデータを格納する。またメモリ213は、端末またはアクセスポイントに通知する情報、または端末またはアクセスポイントから通知された情報、またはこれらの両方を格納する。また、メモリ213は、CPU215の実行に必要なプログラムを記憶し、CPU215がプログラムを実行する際の作業領域として利用されてもよい。メモリ213はSRAM、DRAM等の揮発性メモリでもよいし、NAND、MRAM等の不揮発メモリでもよい。
The memory 213 stores data exchanged with the host system. The memory 213 stores information notified to the terminal or access point, information notified from the terminal or access point, or both. The memory 213 may store a program necessary for the execution of the CPU 215 and may be used as a work area when the CPU 215 executes the program. The memory 213 may be a volatile memory such as SRAM or DRAM, or a nonvolatile memory such as NAND or MRAM.
ホスト・インターフェース214は、ホストシステムと接続するためのインターフェースである。インターフェースは、UART、SPI、SDIO、USB、PCI Expressなど何でも良い。
The host interface 214 is an interface for connecting to the host system. The interface may be anything such as UART, SPI, SDIO, USB, and PCI Express.
CPU215は、プログラムを実行することによりベースバンド回路212を制御するプロセッサである。ベースバンド回路212は、主にMAC層の処理および物理層の処理を行う。ベースバンド回路212、CPU215またはこれらの両方は、通信を制御する通信制御装置、または通信を制御する制御部に対応する。
The CPU 215 is a processor that controls the baseband circuit 212 by executing a program. The baseband circuit 212 mainly performs MAC layer processing and physical layer processing. The baseband circuit 212, the CPU 215, or both of them correspond to a communication control device that controls communication or a control unit that controls communication.
ベースバンド回路212およびCPU215の少なくとも一方は、クロックを生成するクロック生成部を含み、当該クロック生成部で生成するクロックにより、内部時間を管理してもよい。
At least one of the baseband circuit 212 and the CPU 215 may include a clock generation unit that generates a clock, and the internal time may be managed by the clock generated by the clock generation unit.
ベースバンド回路212は、送信するフレームに、物理層の処理として、物理ヘッダの付加、符号化、暗号化、変調処理(MIMO変調を含んでもよい)など行い、例えば2種類のデジタルベースバンド信号(以下、デジタルI信号とデジタルQ信号)を生成する。
The baseband circuit 212 adds a physical header, encodes, encrypts, and modulates (may include MIMO modulation) as a physical layer process to a frame to be transmitted. For example, two types of digital baseband signals ( Hereinafter, a digital I signal and a digital Q signal) are generated.
DAC216は、ベースバンド回路212から入力される信号をDA変換する。より詳細には、DAC216はデジタルI信号をアナログのI信号に変換し、デジタルQ信号をアナログのQ信号に変換する。なお、直交変調せずに一系統の信号のままで送信する場合もありうる。複数のアンテナを備え、一系統または複数系統の送信信号をアンテナの数だけ振り分けて送信する場合には、アンテナの数に応じた数のDAC等を設けてもよい。
The DAC 216 performs DA conversion on the signal input from the baseband circuit 212. More specifically, the DAC 216 converts a digital I signal into an analog I signal and converts a digital Q signal into an analog Q signal. Note that there may be a case where the signal is transmitted as it is without a quadrature modulation. When a plurality of antennas are provided and transmission signals of one system or a plurality of systems are distributed and transmitted by the number of antennas, a number of DACs or the like corresponding to the number of antennas may be provided.
RF IC221は、一例としてRFアナログICあるいは高周波IC、あるいはこれらの両方である。RF IC221は、フィルタ222、ミキサ223、プリアンプ(PA)224、PLL(Phase Locked Loop:位相同期回路)242、低雑音増幅器(LNA)、バラン235、ミキサ233、およびフィルタ232を備える。これらの要素のいくつかが、ベースバンドIC211または別のIC上に配置されてもよい。フィルタ222、232は、帯域通過フィルタでも、低域通過フィルタでもよい。
The RF IC 221 is, for example, an RF analog IC, a high frequency IC, or both. The RF IC 221 includes a filter 222, a mixer 223, a preamplifier (PA) 224, a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) 242, a low noise amplifier (LNA), a balun 235, a mixer 233, and a filter 232. Some of these elements may be located on the baseband IC 211 or another IC. The filters 222 and 232 may be band pass filters or low pass filters.
フィルタ222は、DAC216から入力されるアナログI信号およびアナログQ信号のそれぞれから所望帯域の信号を抽出する。PLL242は、水晶発振器243から入力される発振信号を用い、発振信号を分周または逓倍またはこれらの両方を行うことで、入力信号の位相に同期した、一定周波数の信号を生成する。なお、PLL242は、VCO(Voltage Controlled Oscillator)を備え、水晶発振器243から入力される発振信号に基づき、VCOを利用してフィードバック制御を行うことで、当該一定周波数の信号を得る。生成した一定周波数の信号は、ミキサ223およびミキサ233に入力される。PLL242は、一定周波数の信号を生成する発振器の一例に相当する。
The filter 222 extracts a signal in a desired band from each of the analog I signal and the analog Q signal input from the DAC 216. The PLL 242 uses the oscillation signal input from the crystal oscillator 243 and divides and / or multiplies the oscillation signal to generate a signal having a constant frequency synchronized with the phase of the input signal. The PLL 242 includes a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator), and obtains a signal having the constant frequency by performing feedback control using the VCO based on an oscillation signal input from the crystal oscillator 243. The generated constant frequency signal is input to the mixer 223 and the mixer 233. The PLL 242 corresponds to an example of an oscillator that generates a signal having a constant frequency.
ミキサ223は、フィルタ222を通過したアナログI信号およびアナログQ信号を、PLL242から供給される一定周波数の信号を利用して、無線周波数にアップコンバートする。プリアンプ(PA)は、ミキサ223で生成された無線周波数のアナログI信号およびアナログQ信号を、所望の出力電力まで増幅する。バラン225は、平衡信号(差動信号)を不平衡信号(シングルエンド信号)に変換するための変換器である。RF IC221では平衡信号が扱われるが、RF IC221の出力からアンテナ247までは不平衡信号が扱われるため、バラン225で、これらの信号変換を行う。
The mixer 223 up-converts the analog I signal and the analog Q signal that have passed through the filter 222 to a radio frequency by using a constant frequency signal supplied from the PLL 242. The preamplifier (PA) amplifies the radio frequency analog I signal and analog Q signal generated by the mixer 223 to a desired output power. The balun 225 is a converter for converting a balanced signal (differential signal) into an unbalanced signal (single-ended signal). The RF IC 221 handles balanced signals, but since the unbalanced signal is handled from the output of the RF IC 221 to the antenna 247, these signals are converted by the balun 225.
スイッチ245は、送信時は、送信側のバラン225に接続され、受信時は、受信側の低雑音増幅器(LNA)234またはRF IC221に接続される。スイッチ245の制御はベースバンドIC211またはRF IC221により行われてもよいし、スイッチ245を制御する別の回路が存在し、当該回路からスイッチ245の制御を行ってもよい。
The switch 245 is connected to the balun 225 on the transmission side during transmission, and is connected to the low noise amplifier (LNA) 234 or RF IC 221 on the reception side during reception. The control of the switch 245 may be performed by the baseband IC 211 or the RF IC 221, or another circuit for controlling the switch 245 may exist and the switch 245 may be controlled from the circuit.
プリアンプ224で増幅された無線周波数のアナログI信号およびアナログQ信号は、バラン225で平衡-不平衡変換された後、アンテナ247から空間に電波として放射される。
The radio frequency analog I signal and analog Q signal amplified by the preamplifier 224 are balanced-unbalanced converted by the balun 225 and then radiated as radio waves from the antenna 247.
アンテナ247は、チップアンテナでもよいし、プリント基板上に配線により形成したアンテナでもよいし、線状の導体素子を利用して形成したアンテナでもよい。
The antenna 247 may be a chip antenna, an antenna formed by wiring on a printed board, or an antenna formed by using a linear conductor element.
RF IC221におけるLNA234は、アンテナ247からスイッチ245を介して受信した信号を、雑音を低く抑えたまま、復調可能なレベルまで増幅する。バラン235は、低雑音増幅器(LNA)234で増幅された信号を、不平衡-平衡変換する。なお、バラン235とLNA234の順番を逆にした構成でもよい。ミキサ233は、バラン235で平衡信号に変換された受信信号を、PLL242から入力される一定周波数の信号を用いてベースバンドにダウンコンバートする。より詳細には、ミキサ233は、PLL242から入力される一定周波数の信号に基づき、互いに90°位相のずれた搬送波を生成する手段を有し、バラン235で変換された受信信号を、互いに90°位相のずれた搬送波により直交復調して、受信信号と同位相のI(In-phase)信号と、これより90°位相が遅れたQ(Quad-phase)信号とを生成する。フィルタ232は、これらI信号とQ信号から所望周波数成分の信号を抽出する。フィルタ232で抽出されたI信号およびQ信号は、ゲインが調整された後に、RF IC221から出力される。
The LNA 234 in the RF IC 221 amplifies the signal received from the antenna 247 via the switch 245 to a level that can be demodulated while keeping the noise low. The balun 235 performs an unbalance-balance conversion on the signal amplified by the low noise amplifier (LNA) 234. A configuration in which the order of the balun 235 and the LNA 234 is reversed may be used. The mixer 233 down-converts the received signal converted into the balanced signal by the balun 235 into a baseband using a signal having a constant frequency input from the PLL 242. More specifically, the mixer 233 has means for generating a carrier wave that is 90 ° out of phase based on a constant frequency signal input from the PLL 242, and the received signals converted by the balun 235 are each 90 ° Quadrature demodulation is performed using a carrier wave having a phase shift to generate an I (In-phase) signal having the same phase as the received signal and a Q (Quad-phase) signal that is 90 ° behind the signal. The filter 232 extracts a signal having a desired frequency component from these I signal and Q signal. The I signal and Q signal extracted by the filter 232 are output from the RF IC 221 after the gain is adjusted.
ベースバンドIC211におけるADC217は、RF IC221からの入力信号をAD変換する。より詳細には、ADC217はI信号をデジタルI信号に変換し、Q信号をデジタルQ信号に変換する。なお、直交復調せずに一系統の信号だけを受信する場合もあり得る。
The ADC 217 in the baseband IC 211 AD-converts the input signal from the RF IC 221. More specifically, the ADC 217 converts the I signal into a digital I signal and converts the Q signal into a digital Q signal. There may be a case where only one system signal is received without performing quadrature demodulation.
複数のアンテナが設けられる場合には、アンテナの数に応じた数のADCを設けてもよい。ベースバンド回路212は、デジタルI信号およびデジタルQ信号に基づき、復調処理、誤り訂正符号処理、物理ヘッダの処理など、物理層の処理(MIMO復調を含んでもよい)等を行い、フレームを得る。ベースバンド回路212は、フレームに対してMAC層の処理を行う。なお、ベースバンド回路212は、TCP/IPを実装している場合は、TCP/IPの処理を行う構成も可能である。
When a plurality of antennas are provided, the number of ADCs corresponding to the number of antennas may be provided. Based on the digital I signal and the digital Q signal, the baseband circuit 212 performs physical layer processing (including MIMO demodulation) such as demodulation processing, error correction code processing, and physical header processing, and obtains a frame. The baseband circuit 212 performs MAC layer processing on the frame. Note that the baseband circuit 212 may be configured to perform TCP / IP processing when TCP / IP is implemented.
上述した各部の処理の詳細は、図7または図8の説明から自明であるため、重複する説明は省略する。
The details of the processing of each unit described above are self-evident from the description of FIG. 7 or FIG.
(第8の実施形態)
図18(A)および図18(B)は、それぞれ第8の実施形態に係る無線機器の斜視図である。図18(A)の無線機器はノートPC301であり、図18(B)の無線機器は移動体端末321である。それぞれ、端末(アクセスポイントを含む)の一形態に対応する。ノートPC301および移動体端末321は、それぞれ無線通信装置305、315を搭載している。無線通信装置305、315として、これまで説明してきた端末(アクセスポイントを含む)に搭載されていた無線通信装置を用いることができる。無線通信装置を搭載する無線機器は、ノートPCや移動体端末に限定されない。例えば、TV、デジタルカメラ、ウェアラブルデバイス、タブレット、スマートフォン等にも搭載可能である。 (Eighth embodiment)
18A and 18B are perspective views of wireless devices according to the eighth embodiment, respectively. The wireless device in FIG. 18A is a notebook PC 301, and the wireless device in FIG. 18B is a mobile terminal 321. Each corresponds to one form of a terminal (including an access point). The notebook PC 301 and the mobile terminal 321 are equipped with wireless communication devices 305 and 315, respectively. As the wireless communication devices 305 and 315, a wireless communication device mounted on a terminal (including an access point) described so far can be used. A wireless device equipped with a wireless communication device is not limited to a notebook PC or a mobile terminal. For example, it can be mounted on a TV, a digital camera, a wearable device, a tablet, a smartphone, and the like.
図18(A)および図18(B)は、それぞれ第8の実施形態に係る無線機器の斜視図である。図18(A)の無線機器はノートPC301であり、図18(B)の無線機器は移動体端末321である。それぞれ、端末(アクセスポイントを含む)の一形態に対応する。ノートPC301および移動体端末321は、それぞれ無線通信装置305、315を搭載している。無線通信装置305、315として、これまで説明してきた端末(アクセスポイントを含む)に搭載されていた無線通信装置を用いることができる。無線通信装置を搭載する無線機器は、ノートPCや移動体端末に限定されない。例えば、TV、デジタルカメラ、ウェアラブルデバイス、タブレット、スマートフォン等にも搭載可能である。 (Eighth embodiment)
18A and 18B are perspective views of wireless devices according to the eighth embodiment, respectively. The wireless device in FIG. 18A is a notebook PC 301, and the wireless device in FIG. 18B is a mobile terminal 321. Each corresponds to one form of a terminal (including an access point). The notebook PC 301 and the mobile terminal 321 are equipped with wireless communication devices 305 and 315, respectively. As the wireless communication devices 305 and 315, a wireless communication device mounted on a terminal (including an access point) described so far can be used. A wireless device equipped with a wireless communication device is not limited to a notebook PC or a mobile terminal. For example, it can be mounted on a TV, a digital camera, a wearable device, a tablet, a smartphone, and the like.
また、端末(アクセスポイントを含む)に搭載されていた無線通信装置は、メモリーカードにも搭載可能である。当該無線通信装置をメモリーカードに搭載した例を図19に示す。メモリーカード331は、無線通信装置355と、メモリーカード本体332とを含む。メモリーカード331は、外部の装置との無線通信のために無線通信装置335を利用する。なお、図19では、メモリーカード331内の他の要素(例えばメモリ等)の記載は省略している。
In addition, the wireless communication device mounted on the terminal (including the access point) can be mounted on the memory card. An example in which the wireless communication device is mounted on a memory card is shown in FIG. The memory card 331 includes a wireless communication device 355 and a memory card main body 332. The memory card 331 uses a wireless communication device 335 for wireless communication with an external device. In FIG. 19, description of other elements (for example, a memory) in the memory card 331 is omitted.
(第9の実施形態)
第9の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、バス、プロセッサ部、及び外部インタフェース部を備える。プロセッサ部及び外部インタフェース部は、バスを介してバッファと接続される。プロセッサ部ではファームウエアが動作する。このように、ファームウエアを無線通信装置に含める構成とすることにより、ファームウエアの書き換えによって無線通信装置の機能の変更を容易に行うことが可能となる。 (Ninth embodiment)
In the ninth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a bus, a processor unit, and an external interface unit are provided. The processor unit and the external interface unit are connected to the buffer via the bus. Firmware operates in the processor unit. As described above, by configuring the firmware to be included in the wireless communication device, it is possible to easily change the function of the wireless communication device by rewriting the firmware.
第9の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、バス、プロセッサ部、及び外部インタフェース部を備える。プロセッサ部及び外部インタフェース部は、バスを介してバッファと接続される。プロセッサ部ではファームウエアが動作する。このように、ファームウエアを無線通信装置に含める構成とすることにより、ファームウエアの書き換えによって無線通信装置の機能の変更を容易に行うことが可能となる。 (Ninth embodiment)
In the ninth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a bus, a processor unit, and an external interface unit are provided. The processor unit and the external interface unit are connected to the buffer via the bus. Firmware operates in the processor unit. As described above, by configuring the firmware to be included in the wireless communication device, it is possible to easily change the function of the wireless communication device by rewriting the firmware.
(第10の実施形態)
第10の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、クロック生成部を備える。クロック生成部は、クロックを生成して出力端子より無線通信装置の外部にクロックを出力する。このように、無線通信装置内部で生成されたクロックを外部に出力し、外部に出力されたクロックによってホスト側を動作させることにより、ホスト側と無線通信装置側とを同期させて動作させることが可能となる。 (Tenth embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a clock generation unit is provided. The clock generation unit generates a clock and outputs the clock from the output terminal to the outside of the wireless communication device. Thus, the host side and the wireless communication apparatus side can be operated in synchronization by outputting the clock generated inside the wireless communication apparatus to the outside and operating the host side with the clock output to the outside. It becomes possible.
第10の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、クロック生成部を備える。クロック生成部は、クロックを生成して出力端子より無線通信装置の外部にクロックを出力する。このように、無線通信装置内部で生成されたクロックを外部に出力し、外部に出力されたクロックによってホスト側を動作させることにより、ホスト側と無線通信装置側とを同期させて動作させることが可能となる。 (Tenth embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a clock generation unit is provided. The clock generation unit generates a clock and outputs the clock from the output terminal to the outside of the wireless communication device. Thus, the host side and the wireless communication apparatus side can be operated in synchronization by outputting the clock generated inside the wireless communication apparatus to the outside and operating the host side with the clock output to the outside. It becomes possible.
(第11の実施形態)
第11の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、電源部、電源制御部、及び無線電力給電部を含む。電源制御部は、電源部と無線電力給電部とに接続され、無線通信装置に供給する電源を選択する制御を行う。このように、電源を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、電源を制御した低消費電力化動作が可能となる。 (Eleventh embodiment)
In the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a power supply unit, a power supply control unit, and a wireless power supply unit are included. The power supply control unit is connected to the power supply unit and the wireless power supply unit, and performs control to select a power supply to be supplied to the wireless communication device. As described above, by providing the wireless communication apparatus with the power supply, it is possible to perform a low power consumption operation by controlling the power supply.
第11の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、電源部、電源制御部、及び無線電力給電部を含む。電源制御部は、電源部と無線電力給電部とに接続され、無線通信装置に供給する電源を選択する制御を行う。このように、電源を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、電源を制御した低消費電力化動作が可能となる。 (Eleventh embodiment)
In the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, a power supply unit, a power supply control unit, and a wireless power supply unit are included. The power supply control unit is connected to the power supply unit and the wireless power supply unit, and performs control to select a power supply to be supplied to the wireless communication device. As described above, by providing the wireless communication apparatus with the power supply, it is possible to perform a low power consumption operation by controlling the power supply.
(第12の実施形態)
第12の実施形態では、上述した無線通信装置の構成に加えて、SIMカードを含む。SIMカードは、例えば、無線通信装置における送信部または受信部または制御部と接続される。このように、SIMカードを無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、容易に認証処理を行うことが可能となる。 (Twelfth embodiment)
In the twelfth embodiment, a SIM card is included in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus described above. The SIM card is connected to, for example, a transmission unit, a reception unit, or a control unit in the wireless communication apparatus. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the SIM card is provided in the wireless communication device, authentication processing can be easily performed.
第12の実施形態では、上述した無線通信装置の構成に加えて、SIMカードを含む。SIMカードは、例えば、無線通信装置における送信部または受信部または制御部と接続される。このように、SIMカードを無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、容易に認証処理を行うことが可能となる。 (Twelfth embodiment)
In the twelfth embodiment, a SIM card is included in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus described above. The SIM card is connected to, for example, a transmission unit, a reception unit, or a control unit in the wireless communication apparatus. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the SIM card is provided in the wireless communication device, authentication processing can be easily performed.
(第13の実施形態)
第13の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、動画像圧縮/伸長部を含む。動画像圧縮/伸長部は、バスと接続される。このように、動画像圧縮/伸長部を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、圧縮した動画像の送信と受信した圧縮動画像の伸長とを容易に行うことが可能となる。 (13th Embodiment)
The thirteenth embodiment includes a moving image compression / decompression unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment. The moving image compression / decompression unit is connected to the bus. As described above, by providing the wireless communication device with the moving image compression / decompression unit, it is possible to easily transmit the compressed moving image and expand the received compressed moving image.
第13の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、動画像圧縮/伸長部を含む。動画像圧縮/伸長部は、バスと接続される。このように、動画像圧縮/伸長部を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、圧縮した動画像の送信と受信した圧縮動画像の伸長とを容易に行うことが可能となる。 (13th Embodiment)
The thirteenth embodiment includes a moving image compression / decompression unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment. The moving image compression / decompression unit is connected to the bus. As described above, by providing the wireless communication device with the moving image compression / decompression unit, it is possible to easily transmit the compressed moving image and expand the received compressed moving image.
(第14の実施形態)
第14の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、LED部を含む。LED部は、送信部または受信部または制御部と接続される。このように、LED部を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、無線通信装置の動作状態を、ユーザに容易に通知することが可能となる。 (Fourteenth embodiment)
In the fourteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, an LED unit is included. The LED unit is connected to the transmission unit, the reception unit, or the control unit. As described above, by providing the wireless communication device with the LED unit, it is possible to easily notify the user of the operation state of the wireless communication device.
第14の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、LED部を含む。LED部は、送信部または受信部または制御部と接続される。このように、LED部を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、無線通信装置の動作状態を、ユーザに容易に通知することが可能となる。 (Fourteenth embodiment)
In the fourteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment, an LED unit is included. The LED unit is connected to the transmission unit, the reception unit, or the control unit. As described above, by providing the wireless communication device with the LED unit, it is possible to easily notify the user of the operation state of the wireless communication device.
(第15の実施形態)
第15の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、バイブレータ部を含む。バイブレータ部は、送信部または受信部または制御部と接続される。このように、バイブレータ部を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、無線通信装置の動作状態を、ユーザに容易に通知することが可能となる。 (Fifteenth embodiment)
The fifteenth embodiment includes a vibrator unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment. The vibrator unit is connected to the transmission unit, the reception unit, or the control unit. As described above, by providing the radio communication device with the vibrator unit, it is possible to easily notify the user of the operation state of the radio communication device.
第15の実施形態では、上述した実施形態に係る無線通信装置の構成に加えて、バイブレータ部を含む。バイブレータ部は、送信部または受信部または制御部と接続される。このように、バイブレータ部を無線通信装置に備える構成とすることにより、無線通信装置の動作状態を、ユーザに容易に通知することが可能となる。 (Fifteenth embodiment)
The fifteenth embodiment includes a vibrator unit in addition to the configuration of the wireless communication apparatus according to the above-described embodiment. The vibrator unit is connected to the transmission unit, the reception unit, or the control unit. As described above, by providing the radio communication device with the vibrator unit, it is possible to easily notify the user of the operation state of the radio communication device.
(第16の実施形態)
本実施形態では、[1]無線通信システムにおけるフレーム種別、[2]無線通信装置間の接続切断の手法、[3]無線LANシステムのアクセス方式、[4]無線LANのフレーム間隔について説明する。
[1]通信システムにおけるフレーム種別
一般的に無線通信システムにおける無線アクセスプロトコル上で扱うフレームは、大別してデータ(data)フレーム、管理(management)フレーム、制御(control)フレームの3種類に分けられる。これらの種別は、通常、フレーム間で共通に設けられるヘッダ部で示される。フレーム種別の表示方法としては、1つのフィールドで3種類を区別できるようにしてあってもよいし、2つのフィールドの組み合わせで区別できるようにしてあってもよい。IEEE802.11規格では、フレーム種別の識別は、MACフレームのフレームヘッダ部にあるFrame Controlフィールドの中のType、Subtypeという2つのフィールドで行う。データフレームか、管理フレームか、制御フレームかの大別はTypeフィールドで行われ、大別されたフレームの中での細かい種別、例えば管理フレームの中のBeaconフレームといった識別はSubtypeフィールドで行われる。 (Sixteenth embodiment)
In this embodiment, [1] a frame type in a wireless communication system, [2] a method of disconnecting connections between wireless communication apparatuses, [3] an access method of a wireless LAN system, and [4] a frame interval of the wireless LAN will be described.
[1] Frame Type in Communication System In general, frames handled on a radio access protocol in a radio communication system are roughly classified into three types: a data frame, a management frame, and a control frame. These types are usually indicated by a header portion provided in common between frames. As a display method of the frame type, three types may be distinguished by one field, or may be distinguished by a combination of two fields. In the IEEE 802.11 standard, the frame type is identified by two fields, Type and Subtype, in the Frame Control field in the frame header portion of the MAC frame. A data frame, a management frame, or a control frame is roughly classified in the Type field, and a detailed type in the roughly classified frame, for example, a Beacon frame in the management frame is identified in the Subtype field.
本実施形態では、[1]無線通信システムにおけるフレーム種別、[2]無線通信装置間の接続切断の手法、[3]無線LANシステムのアクセス方式、[4]無線LANのフレーム間隔について説明する。
[1]通信システムにおけるフレーム種別
一般的に無線通信システムにおける無線アクセスプロトコル上で扱うフレームは、大別してデータ(data)フレーム、管理(management)フレーム、制御(control)フレームの3種類に分けられる。これらの種別は、通常、フレーム間で共通に設けられるヘッダ部で示される。フレーム種別の表示方法としては、1つのフィールドで3種類を区別できるようにしてあってもよいし、2つのフィールドの組み合わせで区別できるようにしてあってもよい。IEEE802.11規格では、フレーム種別の識別は、MACフレームのフレームヘッダ部にあるFrame Controlフィールドの中のType、Subtypeという2つのフィールドで行う。データフレームか、管理フレームか、制御フレームかの大別はTypeフィールドで行われ、大別されたフレームの中での細かい種別、例えば管理フレームの中のBeaconフレームといった識別はSubtypeフィールドで行われる。 (Sixteenth embodiment)
In this embodiment, [1] a frame type in a wireless communication system, [2] a method of disconnecting connections between wireless communication apparatuses, [3] an access method of a wireless LAN system, and [4] a frame interval of the wireless LAN will be described.
[1] Frame Type in Communication System In general, frames handled on a radio access protocol in a radio communication system are roughly classified into three types: a data frame, a management frame, and a control frame. These types are usually indicated by a header portion provided in common between frames. As a display method of the frame type, three types may be distinguished by one field, or may be distinguished by a combination of two fields. In the IEEE 802.11 standard, the frame type is identified by two fields, Type and Subtype, in the Frame Control field in the frame header portion of the MAC frame. A data frame, a management frame, or a control frame is roughly classified in the Type field, and a detailed type in the roughly classified frame, for example, a Beacon frame in the management frame is identified in the Subtype field.
管理フレームは、他の無線通信装置との間の物理的な通信リンクの管理に用いるフレームである。例えば、他の無線通信装置との間の通信設定を行うために用いられるフレームや通信リンクをリリースする(つまり接続を切断する)ためのフレーム、無線通信装置でのパワーセーブ動作に係るフレームがある。
The management frame is a frame used for managing a physical communication link with another wireless communication device. For example, there are a frame used for setting communication with another wireless communication device, a frame for releasing a communication link (that is, disconnecting), and a frame related to a power saving operation in the wireless communication device. .
データフレームは、他の無線通信装置と物理的な通信リンクが確立した上で、無線通信装置の内部で生成されたデータを他の無線通信装置に送信するフレームである。データは本実施形態の上位層で生成され、例えばユーザの操作によって生成される。
The data frame is a frame for transmitting data generated inside the wireless communication device to the other wireless communication device after establishing a physical communication link with the other wireless communication device. Data is generated in an upper layer of the present embodiment, for example, generated by a user operation.
制御フレームは、データフレームを他の無線通信装置との間で送受(交換)する際の制御に用いられるフレームである。無線通信装置がデータフレームや管理フレームを受信した場合にその送達確認のために送信される応答フレームは、制御フレームに属する。応答フレームは、例えばACKフレームやBlockAckフレームである。またRTSフレームやCTSフレームも制御フレームである。
The control frame is a frame used for control when a data frame is transmitted / received (exchanged) to / from another wireless communication apparatus. When the wireless communication apparatus receives a data frame or a management frame, the response frame transmitted for confirmation of delivery belongs to the control frame. The response frame is, for example, an ACK frame or a BlockAck frame. RTS frames and CTS frames are also control frames.
これら3種類のフレームは、物理層で必要に応じた処理を経て物理パケットとしてアンテナを経由して送出される。なお、IEEE802.11規格(前述のIEEE Std
802.11ac-2013などの拡張規格を含む)では接続確立の手順の1つとしてアソシエーション(association)プロセスがあるが、その中で使われるAssociation RequestフレームとAssociation Responseフレームが管理フレームであり、Association RequestフレームやAssociation Responseフレームはユニキャストの管理フレームであることから、受信側無線通信端末に応答フレームであるACKフレームの送信を要求し、このACKフレームは上述のように制御フレームである。 These three types of frames are sent out via the antenna as physical packets after undergoing processing as required in the physical layer. Note that the IEEE 802.11 standard (the aforementioned IEEE Std
(Including extended standards such as 802.11ac-2013), there is an association process as one of the procedures for establishing a connection. The association request frame and association response frame used in the process are management frames, and the association request. Since the frame and the Association Response frame are unicast management frames, the reception side wireless communication terminal is requested to transmit an ACK frame as a response frame, and the ACK frame is a control frame as described above.
802.11ac-2013などの拡張規格を含む)では接続確立の手順の1つとしてアソシエーション(association)プロセスがあるが、その中で使われるAssociation RequestフレームとAssociation Responseフレームが管理フレームであり、Association RequestフレームやAssociation Responseフレームはユニキャストの管理フレームであることから、受信側無線通信端末に応答フレームであるACKフレームの送信を要求し、このACKフレームは上述のように制御フレームである。 These three types of frames are sent out via the antenna as physical packets after undergoing processing as required in the physical layer. Note that the IEEE 802.11 standard (the aforementioned IEEE Std
(Including extended standards such as 802.11ac-2013), there is an association process as one of the procedures for establishing a connection. The association request frame and association response frame used in the process are management frames, and the association request. Since the frame and the Association Response frame are unicast management frames, the reception side wireless communication terminal is requested to transmit an ACK frame as a response frame, and the ACK frame is a control frame as described above.
[2]無線通信装置間の接続切断の手法
接続の切断(リリース)には、明示的な手法と暗示的な手法とがある。明示的な手法としては、接続を確立している無線通信装置間のいずれか一方が切断のためのフレームを送信する。IEEE802.11規格ではDeauthenticationフレームがこれに当たり、管理フレームに分類される。通常、接続を切断するフレームを送信する側の無線通信装置では当該フレームを送信した時点で、接続を切断するフレームを受信する側の無線通信装置では当該フレームを受信した時点で、接続の切断と判定する。その後、非アクセスポイントの無線通信端末であれば通信フェーズでの初期状態、例えば接続するBSS探索する状態に戻る。無線通信アクセスポイントがある無線通信端末との間の接続を切断した場合には、例えば無線通信アクセスポイントが自BSSに加入する無線通信端末を管理する接続管理テーブルを持っているならば当該接続管理テーブルから当該無線通信端末に係る情報を削除する。例えば、無線通信アクセスポイントが自BSSに加入する各無線通信端末に接続をアソシエーションプロセスで許可した段階で、AIDを割り当てる場合には、当該接続を切断した無線通信端末のAIDに関連づけられた保持情報を削除し、当該AIDに関してはリリースして他の新規加入する無線通信端末に割り当てられるようにしてもよい。 [2] Connection disconnection method between wireless communication devices There are an explicit method and an implicit method for disconnection (release) of a connection. As an explicit method, one of the wireless communication apparatuses that have established a connection transmits a frame for disconnection. In the IEEE 802.11 standard, a deauthentication frame is classified as a management frame. Normally, when a wireless communication device that transmits a frame for disconnecting a connection transmits the frame, the wireless communication device that receives a frame for disconnecting a connection disconnects the connection when the frame is received. judge. Then, if it is a non-access point wireless communication terminal, it returns to the initial state in the communication phase, for example, the state of searching for a connected BSS. When the connection between a wireless communication access point and a wireless communication terminal is disconnected, for example, if the wireless communication access point has a connection management table for managing a wireless communication terminal that subscribes to its own BSS, the connection management Delete information related to the wireless communication terminal from the table. For example, when an AID is assigned at the stage where the wireless communication access point has permitted connection to each wireless communication terminal that joins its own BSS in the association process, the holding information associated with the AID of the wireless communication terminal that has disconnected the connection May be deleted, and the AID may be released and assigned to another newly joined wireless communication terminal.
接続の切断(リリース)には、明示的な手法と暗示的な手法とがある。明示的な手法としては、接続を確立している無線通信装置間のいずれか一方が切断のためのフレームを送信する。IEEE802.11規格ではDeauthenticationフレームがこれに当たり、管理フレームに分類される。通常、接続を切断するフレームを送信する側の無線通信装置では当該フレームを送信した時点で、接続を切断するフレームを受信する側の無線通信装置では当該フレームを受信した時点で、接続の切断と判定する。その後、非アクセスポイントの無線通信端末であれば通信フェーズでの初期状態、例えば接続するBSS探索する状態に戻る。無線通信アクセスポイントがある無線通信端末との間の接続を切断した場合には、例えば無線通信アクセスポイントが自BSSに加入する無線通信端末を管理する接続管理テーブルを持っているならば当該接続管理テーブルから当該無線通信端末に係る情報を削除する。例えば、無線通信アクセスポイントが自BSSに加入する各無線通信端末に接続をアソシエーションプロセスで許可した段階で、AIDを割り当てる場合には、当該接続を切断した無線通信端末のAIDに関連づけられた保持情報を削除し、当該AIDに関してはリリースして他の新規加入する無線通信端末に割り当てられるようにしてもよい。 [2] Connection disconnection method between wireless communication devices There are an explicit method and an implicit method for disconnection (release) of a connection. As an explicit method, one of the wireless communication apparatuses that have established a connection transmits a frame for disconnection. In the IEEE 802.11 standard, a deauthentication frame is classified as a management frame. Normally, when a wireless communication device that transmits a frame for disconnecting a connection transmits the frame, the wireless communication device that receives a frame for disconnecting a connection disconnects the connection when the frame is received. judge. Then, if it is a non-access point wireless communication terminal, it returns to the initial state in the communication phase, for example, the state of searching for a connected BSS. When the connection between a wireless communication access point and a wireless communication terminal is disconnected, for example, if the wireless communication access point has a connection management table for managing a wireless communication terminal that subscribes to its own BSS, the connection management Delete information related to the wireless communication terminal from the table. For example, when an AID is assigned at the stage where the wireless communication access point has permitted connection to each wireless communication terminal that joins its own BSS in the association process, the holding information associated with the AID of the wireless communication terminal that has disconnected the connection May be deleted, and the AID may be released and assigned to another newly joined wireless communication terminal.
一方、暗示的な手法としては、接続を確立した接続相手の無線通信装置から一定期間フレーム送信(データフレーム及び管理フレームの送信、あるいは自装置が送信したフレームへの応答フレームの送信)を検知しなかった場合に、接続状態の切断の判定を行う。このような手法があるのは、上述のように接続の切断を判定するような状況では、接続先の無線通信装置と通信距離が離れて無線信号が受信不可あるいは復号不可になるなど物理的な無線リンクが確保できない状態が考えられるからである。すなわち、接続を切断するフレームの受信を期待できないからである。
On the other hand, as an implicit method, a frame transmission (transmission of a data frame and a management frame, or transmission of a response frame to a frame transmitted by the device itself) is detected from a wireless communication device of a connection partner with which a connection has been established. If not, it is determined whether the connection is disconnected. There is such a method in the situation where it is determined that the connection is disconnected as described above, such that the communication distance is away from the connection-destination wireless communication device, and the wireless signal cannot be received or decoded. This is because a wireless link cannot be secured. That is, it is impossible to expect reception of a frame for disconnecting the connection.
暗示的な方法で接続の切断を判定する具体例としては、タイマを使用する。例えば、送達確認応答フレームを要求するデータフレームを送信する際、当該フレームの再送期間を制限する第1のタイマ(例えばデータフレーム用の再送タイマ)を起動し、第1のタイマが切れるまで(つまり所望の再送期間が経過するまで)当該フレームへの送達確認応答フレームを受信しないと再送を行う。当該フレームへの送達確認応答フレームを受信すると第1のタイマは止められる。
A timer is used as a specific example of determining disconnection by an implicit method. For example, when transmitting a data frame requesting a delivery confirmation response frame, a first timer (for example, a retransmission timer for a data frame) that limits a retransmission period of the frame is started, and until the first timer expires (that is, If a delivery confirmation response frame is not received (until the desired retransmission period elapses), retransmission is performed. The first timer is stopped when a delivery confirmation response frame to the frame is received.
一方、送達確認応答フレームを受信せず第1のタイマが切れると、例えば接続相手の無線通信装置がまだ(通信レンジ内に)存在するか(言い換えれば、無線リンクが確保できているか)を確認するための管理フレームを送信し、それと同時に当該フレームの再送期間を制限する第2のタイマ(例えば管理フレーム用の再送タイマ)を起動する。第1のタイマと同様、第2のタイマでも、第2のタイマが切れるまで当該フレームへの送達確認応答フレームを受信しないと再送を行い、第2のタイマが切れると接続が切断されたと判定する。接続が切断されたと判定した段階で、前記接続を切断するフレームを送信するようにしてもよい。
On the other hand, when the first timer expires without receiving the delivery confirmation response frame, for example, it is confirmed whether the other party's wireless communication device still exists (within the communication range) (in other words, the wireless link can be secured). And a second timer for limiting the retransmission period of the frame (for example, a retransmission timer for the management frame) is started at the same time. Similar to the first timer, the second timer also performs retransmission if it does not receive an acknowledgment frame for the frame until the second timer expires, and determines that the connection has been disconnected when the second timer expires. . When it is determined that the connection has been disconnected, a frame for disconnecting the connection may be transmitted.
あるいは、接続相手の無線通信装置からフレームを受信すると第3のタイマを起動し、新たに接続相手の無線通信装置からフレームを受信するたびに第3のタイマを止め、再び初期値から起動する。第3のタイマが切れると前述と同様に接続相手の無線通信装置がまだ(通信レンジ内に)存在するか(言い換えれば、無線リンクが確保できているか)を確認するための管理フレームを送信し、それと同時に当該フレームの再送期間を制限する第2のタイマ(例えば管理フレーム用の再送タイマ)を起動する。この場合も、第2のタイマが切れるまで当該フレームへの送達確認応答フレームを受信しないと再送を行い、第2のタイマが切れると接続が切断されたと判定する。この場合も、接続が切断されたと判定した段階で、前記接続を切断するフレームを送信するようにしてもよい。後者の、接続相手の無線通信装置がまだ存在するかを確認するための管理フレームは、前者の場合の管理フレームとは異なるものであってもよい。また後者の場合の管理フレームの再送を制限するためのタイマは、ここでは第2のタイマとして前者の場合と同じものを用いたが、異なるタイマを用いるようにしてもよい。
Alternatively, when a frame is received from the connection partner wireless communication device, the third timer is started. Whenever a new frame is received from the connection partner wireless communication device, the third timer is stopped and restarted from the initial value. When the third timer expires, a management frame is transmitted to confirm whether the other party's wireless communication device still exists (within the communication range) (in other words, whether the wireless link has been secured) as described above. At the same time, a second timer (for example, a retransmission timer for management frames) that limits the retransmission period of the frame is started. Also in this case, if the acknowledgment response frame to the frame is not received until the second timer expires, retransmission is performed, and if the second timer expires, it is determined that the connection has been disconnected. In this case as well, a frame for disconnecting the connection may be transmitted when it is determined that the connection has been disconnected. The latter management frame for confirming whether the wireless communication apparatus of the connection partner still exists may be different from the management frame in the former case. In the latter case, the timer for limiting the retransmission of the management frame is the same as that in the former case as the second timer, but a different timer may be used.
[3]無線LANシステムのアクセス方式
例えば、複数の無線通信装置と通信または競合することを想定した無線LANシステムがある。IEEE802.11無線LANではCSMA/CA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Carrier Avoidance)をアクセス方式の基本としている。ある無線通信装置の送信を把握し、その送信終了から固定時間を置いて送信を行う方式では、その無線通信装置の送信を把握した複数の無線通信装置で同時に送信を行うことになり、その結果、無線信号が衝突してフレーム送信に失敗する。ある無線通信装置の送信を把握し、その送信終了からランダム時間待つことで、その無線通信装置の送信を把握した複数の無線通信装置での送信が確率的に分散することになる。よって、ランダム時間の中で最も早い時間を引いた無線通信装置が1つなら無線通信装置のフレーム送信は成功し、フレームの衝突を防ぐことができる。ランダム値に基づき送信権の獲得が複数の無線通信装置間で公平になることから、Carrier Avoidanceを採用した方式は、複数の無線通信装置間で無線媒体を共有するために適した方式であるということができる。 [3] Access method of wireless LAN system For example, there is a wireless LAN system that is assumed to communicate or compete with a plurality of wireless communication devices. The IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN uses CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Carrier Avoidance) as a basic access method. In the method of grasping the transmission of a certain wireless communication device and performing transmission after a fixed time from the end of the transmission, the transmission is performed simultaneously by a plurality of wireless communication devices grasping the transmission of the wireless communication device, and as a result The radio signal collides and frame transmission fails. By grasping the transmission of a certain wireless communication device and waiting for a random time from the end of the transmission, the transmissions by a plurality of wireless communication devices that grasp the transmission of the wireless communication device are stochastically dispersed. Therefore, if there is one wireless communication device that has drawn the earliest time in the random time, the frame transmission of the wireless communication device is successful, and frame collision can be prevented. Since acquisition of transmission rights is fair among a plurality of wireless communication devices based on a random value, the method employing Carrier Aviation is a method suitable for sharing a wireless medium between a plurality of wireless communication devices. be able to.
例えば、複数の無線通信装置と通信または競合することを想定した無線LANシステムがある。IEEE802.11無線LANではCSMA/CA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Carrier Avoidance)をアクセス方式の基本としている。ある無線通信装置の送信を把握し、その送信終了から固定時間を置いて送信を行う方式では、その無線通信装置の送信を把握した複数の無線通信装置で同時に送信を行うことになり、その結果、無線信号が衝突してフレーム送信に失敗する。ある無線通信装置の送信を把握し、その送信終了からランダム時間待つことで、その無線通信装置の送信を把握した複数の無線通信装置での送信が確率的に分散することになる。よって、ランダム時間の中で最も早い時間を引いた無線通信装置が1つなら無線通信装置のフレーム送信は成功し、フレームの衝突を防ぐことができる。ランダム値に基づき送信権の獲得が複数の無線通信装置間で公平になることから、Carrier Avoidanceを採用した方式は、複数の無線通信装置間で無線媒体を共有するために適した方式であるということができる。 [3] Access method of wireless LAN system For example, there is a wireless LAN system that is assumed to communicate or compete with a plurality of wireless communication devices. The IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN uses CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Carrier Avoidance) as a basic access method. In the method of grasping the transmission of a certain wireless communication device and performing transmission after a fixed time from the end of the transmission, the transmission is performed simultaneously by a plurality of wireless communication devices grasping the transmission of the wireless communication device, and as a result The radio signal collides and frame transmission fails. By grasping the transmission of a certain wireless communication device and waiting for a random time from the end of the transmission, the transmissions by a plurality of wireless communication devices that grasp the transmission of the wireless communication device are stochastically dispersed. Therefore, if there is one wireless communication device that has drawn the earliest time in the random time, the frame transmission of the wireless communication device is successful, and frame collision can be prevented. Since acquisition of transmission rights is fair among a plurality of wireless communication devices based on a random value, the method employing Carrier Aviation is a method suitable for sharing a wireless medium between a plurality of wireless communication devices. be able to.
[4]無線LANのフレーム間隔
IEEE802.11無線LANのフレーム間隔について説明する。IEEE802.11無線LANで用いられるフレーム間隔は、distributed coordination function interframe space(DIFS)、arbitration interframe space(AIFS)、point coordination function interframe space(PIFS)、short interframe space(SIFS)、extended interframe space(EIFS)、reduced interframe space(RIFS)の6種類ある。 [4] Wireless LAN Frame Interval The IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN frame interval will be described. The frame interval used in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN is as follows: distributed coordination function inter frame space (DIFS), arbitration inter frame space (AIFS), point coordination function intra interface space interface (IFS). There are six types, reduced interface space (RIFS).
IEEE802.11無線LANのフレーム間隔について説明する。IEEE802.11無線LANで用いられるフレーム間隔は、distributed coordination function interframe space(DIFS)、arbitration interframe space(AIFS)、point coordination function interframe space(PIFS)、short interframe space(SIFS)、extended interframe space(EIFS)、reduced interframe space(RIFS)の6種類ある。 [4] Wireless LAN Frame Interval The IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN frame interval will be described. The frame interval used in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN is as follows: distributed coordination function inter frame space (DIFS), arbitration inter frame space (AIFS), point coordination function intra interface space interface (IFS). There are six types, reduced interface space (RIFS).
フレーム間隔の定義は、IEEE802.11無線LANでは送信前にキャリアセンスアイドルを確認して開けるべき連続期間として定義されており、厳密な前のフレームからの期間は議論しない。従ってここでのIEEE802.11無線LANシステムでの説明においてはその定義を踏襲する。IEEE802.11無線LANでは、CSMA/CAに基づくランダムアクセスの際に待つ時間を固定時間とランダム時間との和としており、固定時間を明確にするため、このような定義になっているといえる。
The definition of the frame interval is defined as a continuous period to be opened after confirming the carrier sense idle before transmission in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN, and a strict period from the previous frame is not discussed. Therefore, in the description of the IEEE802.11 wireless LAN system here, the definition follows. In the IEEE802.11 wireless LAN, the waiting time for random access based on CSMA / CA is the sum of a fixed time and a random time, and it can be said that such a definition is used to clarify the fixed time.
DIFSとAIFSとは、CSMA/CAに基づき他の無線通信装置と競合するコンテンション期間にフレーム交換開始を試みるときに用いるフレーム間隔である。DIFSは、トラヒック種別による優先権の区別がないとき、AIFSはトラヒック種別(Traffic Identifier:TID)による優先権が設けられている場合に用いる。
DIFS and AIFS are frame intervals used when attempting to start frame exchange during a contention period competing with other wireless communication devices based on CSMA / CA. The DIFS is used when priority according to the traffic type (Traffic Identifier: TID) is provided when there is no distinction of the priority according to the traffic type.
DIFSとAIFSとで係る動作としては類似しているため、以降では主にAIFSを用いて説明する。IEEE802.11無線LANでは、MAC層でフレーム交換の開始などを含むアクセス制御を行う。さらに、上位層からデータを渡される際にQoS(Quality of Service)対応する場合には、データとともにトラヒック種別が通知され、トラヒック種別に基づいてデータはアクセス時の優先度のクラス分けがされる。このアクセス時のクラスをアクセスカテゴリ(Access Category;AC)と呼ぶ。従って、アクセスカテゴリごとにAIFSの値が設けられることになる。
Since operations related to DIFS and AIFS are similar, the following description will be mainly made using AIFS. In the IEEE802.11 wireless LAN, access control including the start of frame exchange is performed in the MAC layer. Further, when QoS (Quality of Service) is supported when data is transferred from an upper layer, the traffic type is notified together with the data, and the data is classified according to the priority at the time of access based on the traffic type. This class at the time of access is called an access category (AC). Therefore, an AIFS value is provided for each access category.
PIFSは、競合する他の無線通信装置よりも優先権を持つアクセスができるようにするためのフレーム間隔であり、DIFS及びAIFSのいずれの値よりも期間が短い。SIFSは、応答系の制御フレームの送信時あるいは一旦アクセス権を獲得した後にバーストでフレーム交換を継続する場合に用いることができるフレーム間隔である。EIFSはフレーム受信に失敗した(受信したフレームがエラーであると判定した)場合に発動されるフレーム間隔である。
PIFS is a frame interval for enabling access with priority over other competing wireless communication devices, and has a shorter period than either of the values of DIFS and AIFS. SIFS is a frame interval that can be used when transmitting a control frame of a response system or when frame exchange is continued in a burst after acquiring an access right once. The EIFS is a frame interval that is activated when frame reception fails (it is determined that the received frame is an error).
RIFSは一旦アクセス権を獲得した後にバーストで同一無線通信装置に複数のフレームを連続して送信する場合に用いることができるフレーム間隔であり、RIFSを用いている間は送信相手の無線通信装置からの応答フレームを要求しない。
The RIFS is a frame interval that can be used when a plurality of frames are continuously transmitted to the same wireless communication device in bursts after acquiring the access right once. Do not request a response frame.
ここでIEEE802.11無線LANにおけるランダムアクセスに基づく競合期間のフレーム交換の一例を図20に示す。
Here, FIG. 20 shows an example of a frame exchange during a contention period based on random access in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN. *
ある無線通信装置においてデータフレーム(W_DATA1)の送信要求が発生した際に、キャリアセンスの結果、媒体がビジーである(busy medium)と認識する場合を想定する。この場合、キャリアセンスがアイドルになった時点から固定時間のAIFSを空け、その後ランダム時間(random backoff)空いたところで、データフレームW_DATA1を通信相手に送信する。なお、キャリアセンスの結果、媒体がビジーではない、つまり媒体がアイドル(idle)であると認識した場合には、キャリアセンスを開始した時点から固定時間のAIFSを空けて、データフレームW_DATA1を通信相手に送信する。
It is assumed that when a transmission request for a data frame (W_DATA1) is generated in a certain wireless communication apparatus, the medium is recognized as busy (busy medium) as a result of carrier sense. In this case, the AIFS of a fixed time is vacated from the time when the carrier sense becomes idle, and then the data frame W_DATA1 is transmitted to the communication partner when the random time (random backoff) is vacant. As a result of carrier sense, when the medium is not busy, that is, it is recognized that the medium is idle, a fixed time AIFS is released from the time when carrier sense is started, and the data frame W_DATA1 is transferred to the communication partner. Send to.
ランダム時間は0から整数で与えられるコンテンションウィンドウ(Contention Window:CW)の間の一様分布から導かれる擬似ランダム整数にスロット時間をかけたものである。ここで、CWにスロット時間をかけたものをCW時間幅と呼ぶ。CWの初期値はCWminで与えられ、再送するたびにCWの値はCWmaxになるまで増やされる。CWminとCWmaxとの両方とも、AIFSと同様アクセスカテゴリごとの値を持つ。W_DATA1の送信先の無線通信装置では、データフレームの受信に成功し、かつ当該データフレームが応答フレームの送信を要求するフレームであるとそのデータフレームを内包する物理パケットの無線媒体上での占有終了時点からSIFS後に応答フレーム(W_ACK1)を送信する。W_DATA1を送信した無線通信装置は、W_ACK1を受信すると送信バースト時間制限内であればまたW_ACK1を内包する物理パケットの無線媒体上での占有終了時点からSIFS後に次のフレーム(例えばW_DATA2)を送信することができる。
The random time is obtained by multiplying a pseudo-random integer derived from a uniform distribution between contention windows (Content Window: CW) given by an integer from 0 to a slot time. Here, CW multiplied by slot time is referred to as CW time width. The initial value of CW is given by CWmin, and every time retransmission is performed, the value of CW is increased until it reaches CWmax. Both CWmin and CWmax have values for each access category, similar to AIFS. In the wireless communication apparatus that is the transmission destination of W_DATA1, if the data frame is successfully received and the data frame is a frame that requests transmission of a response frame, the occupation of the physical packet that includes the data frame on the wireless medium is completed. A response frame (W_ACK1) is transmitted after SIFS from the time point. Upon receiving W_ACK1, the wireless communication apparatus that has transmitted W_DATA1 transmits the next frame (for example, W_DATA2) after SIFS from the time when the physical packet containing W_ACK1 is occupied on the wireless medium if within the transmission burst time limit. be able to.
AIFS、DIFS、PIFS及びEIFSは、SIFSとスロット時間との関数になるが、SIFSとスロット時間とは物理層ごとに規定されている。また、AIFS、CWmin及びCWmaxなどアクセスカテゴリごとに値が設けられるパラメータは、通信グループ(IEEE802.11無線LANではBasic Service Set(BSS))ごとに設定可能であるが、デフォルト値が定められている。
AIFS, DIFS, PIFS, and EIFS are functions of SIFS and slot time, and SIFS and slot time are defined for each physical layer. Parameters for which values are provided for each access category, such as AIFS, CWmin, and CWmax, can be set for each communication group (Basic Service Set (BSS) in the IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN), but default values are set. .
例えば、802.11acの規格策定では、SIFSは16μs、スロット時間は9μsであるとして、それによってPIFSは25μs、DIFSは34μs、AIFSにおいてアクセスカテゴリがBACKGROUND(AC_BK)のフレーム間隔はデフォルト値が79μs、BEST EFFORT(AC_BE)のフレーム間隔はデフォルト値が43μs、VIDEO(AC_VI)とVOICE(AC_VO)のフレーム間隔はデフォルト値が34μs、CWminとCWmaxとのデフォルト値は、各々AC_BKとAC_BEとでは31と1023、AC_VIでは15と31、AC_VOでは7と15になるとする。なお、EIFSは、基本的にはSIFSとDIFSと最も低速な必須の物理レートで送信する場合の応答フレームの時間長の和である。なお効率的なEIFSの取り方ができる無線通信装置では、EIFSを発動した物理パケットへの応答フレームを運ぶ物理パケットの占有時間長を推定し、SIFSとDIFSとその推定時間の和とすることもできる。本実施形態では、このようなフレーム間隔のパラメータを用いる無線通信システムを通信レンジの広い干渉システムとして想定する。
For example, in the 802.11ac standard formulation, the SIFS is 16 μs and the slot time is 9 μs. Accordingly, the PIFS is 25 μs, the DIFS is 34 μs, and the frame interval of the access category BACKGROUND (AC_BK) in AIFS is 79 μs by default. The frame interval of BEST EFFORT (AC_BE) has a default value of 43 μs, the frame interval of VIDEO (AC_VI) and VOICE (AC_VO) has a default value of 34 μs, and the default values of CWmin and CWmax are 31 and 1023 for AC_BK and AC_BE, respectively. , AC_VI is 15 and 31, and AC_VO is 7 and 15. Note that the EIFS is basically the sum of the time lengths of response frames in the case of transmission at SIFS and DIFS at the slowest required physical rate. In a wireless communication apparatus capable of efficiently taking EIFS, the occupation time length of a physical packet carrying a response frame to a physical packet that has activated EIFS is estimated, and the sum of SIFS, DIFS, and the estimated time may be used. it can. In the present embodiment, a wireless communication system using such a frame interval parameter is assumed as an interference system having a wide communication range.
なお、各実施形態で記載されているフレームは、Null Data Packetなど、IEEE802.11規格または準拠する規格で、パケットと呼ばれるものを指してもよい。
It should be noted that the frame described in each embodiment may refer to what is called a packet in the IEEE 802.11 standard or a compliant standard such as Null Data Packet.
なお、複数の端末が送信するフレームは、異なる内容のフレームであっても、同一の内容のフレームでもよい。一般的な表現として、複数の端末が第Xのフレームを送信または受信すると表現するとき、これらの第Xのフレームの内容は同じであっても、異なってもよい。Xは任意の値である。同様に、端末が複数の第Xフレームを(時系列に)送信すると表現するとき、これらの第Xのフレームの内容は同じであっても、異なってもよい。Xは任意の値である。
Note that frames transmitted by a plurality of terminals may have different contents or the same contents. As a general expression, when it is expressed that a plurality of terminals transmit or receive the Xth frame, the contents of these Xth frames may be the same or different. X is an arbitrary value. Similarly, when it is expressed that the terminal transmits a plurality of Xth frames (in time series), the contents of these Xth frames may be the same or different. X is an arbitrary value.
本実施形態で用いられる用語は、広く解釈されるべきである。例えば用語“プロセッサ”は、汎用目的プロセッサ、中央処理装置(CPU)、マイクロプロセッサ、デジタル信号プロセッサ(DSP)、コントローラ、マイクロコントローラ、状態マシンなどを包含してもよい。状況によって、“プロセッサ”は、特定用途向け集積回路、フィールドプログラマブルゲートアレイ(FPGA)、プログラム可能論理回路 (PLD)などを指してもよい。“プロセッサ”は、複数のマイクロプロセッサのような処理装置の組み合わせ、DSPおよびマイクロプロセッサの組み合わせ、DSPコアと協働する1つ以上のマイクロプロセッサを指してもよい。
The terms used in this embodiment should be interpreted widely. For example, the term “processor” may include general purpose processors, central processing units (CPUs), microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), controllers, microcontrollers, state machines, and the like. Depending on the situation, a “processor” may refer to an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array (FPGA), a programmable logic circuit (PLD), or the like. “Processor” may refer to a combination of processing devices such as a plurality of microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and one or more microprocessors that cooperate with a DSP core.
別の例として、用語“メモリ”は、電子情報を格納可能な任意の電子部品を包含してもよい。“メモリ”は、ランダムアクセスメモリ(RAM)、読み出し専用メモリ(ROM)、プログラム可能読み出し専用メモリ(PROM)、消去可能プログラム可能読み出し専用メモリ(EPROM)、電気的消去可能PROM(EEPROM)、不揮発性ランダムアクセスメモリ(NVRAM)、フラッシュメモリ、磁気または光学データストレージを指してもよく、これらはプロセッサによって読み出し可能である。プロセッサがメモリに対して情報を読み出しまたは書き込みまたはこれらの両方を行うならば、メモリはプロセッサと電気的に通信すると言うことができる。メモリは、プロセッサに統合されてもよく、この場合も、メモリは、プロセッサと電気的に通信していると言うことができる。
As another example, the term “memory” may encompass any electronic component capable of storing electronic information. “Memory” means random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), programmable read only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable PROM (EEPROM), non-volatile It may refer to random access memory (NVRAM), flash memory, magnetic or optical data storage, which can be read by the processor. If the processor reads and / or writes information to the memory, the memory can be said to be in electrical communication with the processor. The memory may be integrated into the processor, which again can be said to be in electrical communication with the processor.
なお、本発明は上記実施形態そのままに限定されるものではなく、実施段階ではその要旨を逸脱しない範囲で構成要素を変形して具体化できる。また、上記実施形態に開示されている複数の構成要素の適宜な組み合わせにより、種々の発明を形成できる。例えば、実施形態に示される全構成要素から幾つかの構成要素を削除してもよい。さらに、異なる実施形態にわたる構成要素を適宜組み合わせてもよい。
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as it is, and can be embodied by modifying constituent elements without departing from the scope of the invention in the implementation stage. In addition, various inventions can be formed by appropriately combining a plurality of components disclosed in the embodiment. For example, some components may be deleted from all the components shown in the embodiment. Furthermore, constituent elements over different embodiments may be appropriately combined.
1:アクセスポイント(無線端末)
12A、12B、12C、12D:アンテナ
1、2、3、4:無線端末
1A、2A、3A、4A:アンテナ
21、23、25、27:要求フレーム
22、22A:問い合わせフレーム
28:通知フレーム
29~32:データフレーム
33:BlockACKフレーム
101、201:制御部
102、202:送信部
103、203:受信部
104、204:バッファ
111、211:ベースバンド部
121、221:RF部
122、222:送信回路
123、223:受信回路
112、212:制御回路
113、213:送信処理回路
114、214:受信処理回路
115、116、215、216:DA変換回路
117、118、217、218:AD変換回路
301:ノートPC
305、315、355:無線通信装置
321:移動体端末
331:メモリーカード
332:メモリーカード本体 1: Access point (wireless terminal)
12A, 12B, 12C, 12D: antennas 1, 2, 3, 4: wireless terminals 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A: antennas 21, 23, 25, 27: request frames 22, 22A: inquiry frames 28: notification frames 29 to 32: Data frame 33: BlockACK frame 101, 201: Control unit 102, 202: Transmission unit 103, 203: Reception unit 104, 204: Buffer 111, 211: Baseband unit 121, 221: RF unit 122, 222: Transmission circuit 123, 223: reception circuit 112, 212: control circuit 113, 213: transmission processing circuit 114, 214: reception processing circuit 115, 116, 215, 216: DA conversion circuit 117, 118, 217, 218: AD conversion circuit 301: Notebook PC
305, 315, 355: Wireless communication device 321: Mobile terminal 331: Memory card 332: Memory card body
12A、12B、12C、12D:アンテナ
1、2、3、4:無線端末
1A、2A、3A、4A:アンテナ
21、23、25、27:要求フレーム
22、22A:問い合わせフレーム
28:通知フレーム
29~32:データフレーム
33:BlockACKフレーム
101、201:制御部
102、202:送信部
103、203:受信部
104、204:バッファ
111、211:ベースバンド部
121、221:RF部
122、222:送信回路
123、223:受信回路
112、212:制御回路
113、213:送信処理回路
114、214:受信処理回路
115、116、215、216:DA変換回路
117、118、217、218:AD変換回路
301:ノートPC
305、315、355:無線通信装置
321:移動体端末
331:メモリーカード
332:メモリーカード本体 1: Access point (wireless terminal)
12A, 12B, 12C, 12D:
305, 315, 355: Wireless communication device 321: Mobile terminal 331: Memory card 332: Memory card body
Claims (27)
- 少なくとも1つのアンテナと、
前記アンテナを介して、フレームを送受信する無線通信部と、
前記無線通信部を介して、送信の許可を要求する第1フレームを受信し、
前記第1フレームの受信に応じて、前記無線通信部を介して、前記第1フレームを送信した第1端末と異なる第2端末に前記送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第2フレームを送信し、
前記無線通信部を介して、前記送信の要求の有無を通知する第3フレームを受信し、
前記第1フレームと前記第3フレームに基づいて、前記無線通信部を介して、前記送信を許可する第3端末を指定した第4フレームを送信し、
前記第4フレームの送信完了後に、前記無線通信部を介して、第5フレームを受信する、制御部
を備えた無線通信端末。 At least one antenna;
A wireless communication unit for transmitting and receiving a frame via the antenna;
Receiving a first frame requesting permission for transmission via the wireless communication unit;
In response to the reception of the first frame, a second frame for inquiring whether there is a request for transmission to a second terminal different from the first terminal that transmitted the first frame is transmitted via the wireless communication unit,
Via the wireless communication unit, receiving a third frame to notify the presence or absence of the transmission request,
Based on the first frame and the third frame, a fourth frame specifying the third terminal permitted to transmit is transmitted via the wireless communication unit,
A wireless communication terminal comprising: a control unit that receives the fifth frame via the wireless communication unit after completing transmission of the fourth frame. - 前記第2フレームは、前記第2端末を特定する第1情報を含む
請求項1に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to claim 1, wherein the second frame includes first information for specifying the second terminal. - 前記第2フレームには、複数の前記第2端末の識別子が順番に配置され、
前記制御部は、前記順番に配置された識別子の所定位置に配置された識別子を有する前記第2端末から、前記第2フレームの送信完了後に送信される前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項2に記載の無線通信端末。 In the second frame, a plurality of identifiers of the second terminals are arranged in order,
The said control part receives the said 3rd frame transmitted after the completion of transmission of the said 2nd frame from the said 2nd terminal which has the identifier arrange | positioned in the predetermined position of the identifier arrange | positioned in order. The wireless communication terminal described. - 前記制御部は、前記所定位置に配置された識別子を有する前記第2端末以外の他の第2端末を順番に選択し、選択した前記他の第2端末に前記第3フレームの送信を要求する第6フレームを送信し、前記第6フレームの応答として前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項3に記載の無線通信端末。 The control unit sequentially selects a second terminal other than the second terminal having the identifier arranged at the predetermined position, and requests the selected second terminal to transmit the third frame. The wireless communication terminal according to claim 3, wherein a sixth frame is transmitted and the third frame is received as a response to the sixth frame. - 前記第2フレームは、前記第2端末ごとに前記第3フレームの送信タイミングを特定する第2情報を含み、前記第2情報で指定した送信タイミングでそれぞれ送信される前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項2に記載の無線通信端末。 The second frame includes second information for specifying a transmission timing of the third frame for each second terminal, and receives the third frames respectively transmitted at a transmission timing specified by the second information. Item 3. A wireless communication terminal according to Item 2. - 前記第2フレームには、前記第2端末の識別子が順番に配置され、
前記第2端末の前記第3フレームの送信タイミングは、前記第2端末の識別子が配置された順序によって定まる
請求項5に記載の無線通信端末。 In the second frame, the identifiers of the second terminals are arranged in order,
The wireless communication terminal according to claim 5, wherein the transmission timing of the third frame of the second terminal is determined by the order in which the identifiers of the second terminal are arranged. - 複数の装置のそれぞれが、少なくとも1つのグループのうち少なくともいずれかに属しており、
前記第1情報は、前記少なくとも1つのグループのうちの1つの前記グループのグループ識別子を含む
請求項2に記載の無線通信端末。 Each of the plurality of devices belongs to at least one of at least one group;
The wireless communication terminal according to claim 2, wherein the first information includes a group identifier of one of the at least one group. - 前記第1情報は、前記1つのグループに属する端末のうちの1台の前記第2端末の識別子をさらに含み、前記1台の第2端末から、前記第2フレームの送信完了後に送信される前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項7に記載の無線通信端末。 The first information further includes an identifier of one of the second terminals among terminals belonging to the one group, and is transmitted from the one second terminal after completion of transmission of the second frame. The wireless communication terminal according to claim 7, wherein the third frame is received. - 前記制御部は、前記1つのグループに属する端末の識別子を順番に配置したグループ情報を前記1つのグループに属している前記端末に送信し、
前記制御部は、前記グループ情報において所定位置に配置された前記識別子を有する端末である前記第2端末から、前記第2フレームの送信完了後に送信される前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項7に記載の無線通信端末。 The control unit transmits group information in which identifiers of terminals belonging to the one group are arranged in order to the terminals belonging to the one group,
The control unit receives the third frame transmitted after the transmission of the second frame is completed from the second terminal, which is the terminal having the identifier arranged at a predetermined position in the group information. The wireless communication terminal described. - 前記制御部は、前記1つのグループに属する端末のうち前記1台の第2端末以外の他の第2端末を順番に選択して、前記第3フレームの送信を要求する第6フレームを送信し、前記第6フレームの応答として前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項8または9に記載の無線通信端末。 The control unit sequentially selects second terminals other than the second terminal among the terminals belonging to the one group, and transmits a sixth frame requesting transmission of the third frame. The wireless communication terminal according to claim 8, wherein the third frame is received as a response of the sixth frame. - 前記制御部は、前記1つのグループに属する端末の識別子を順番に配置したグループ情報を前記グループに属している前記端末に送信し、
前記制御部は、前記第2フレームの送信完了後、前記グループ情報において前記第2端末の識別子の配置順序に応じたタイミングでそれぞれ送信される前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項7に記載の無線通信端末。 The control unit transmits group information in which identifiers of terminals belonging to the one group are arranged in order to the terminals belonging to the group,
8. The radio according to claim 7, wherein the control unit receives the third frame transmitted at a timing corresponding to an arrangement order of identifiers of the second terminals in the group information after the transmission of the second frame is completed. Communication terminal. - 前記制御部は、前記第2端末からCSMA/CAに従って送信される前記第3フレームを受信する
請求項1、2、または7に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to claim 1, wherein the control unit receives the third frame transmitted from the second terminal according to CSMA / CA. - 前記第2フレームは、前記第3フレームの受信を受け付け可能な期間に関する第3情報を含む
請求項1ないし12のいずれか一項に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the second frame includes third information regarding a period during which reception of the third frame can be accepted. - 前記制御部は、前記第3情報に示される期間の経過後に前記第4フレームを送信する
請求項13に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to claim 13, wherein the control unit transmits the fourth frame after elapse of a period indicated by the third information. - 前記第1フレームおよび前記第3フレームは、前記送信を希望する時間、前記送信を希望するデータサイズ、前記送信を行うストリーム数、誤り訂正方式、変調方式、符号化方式、または前記送信を行うチャネルのうち、少なくとも1つに関する情報を含む
請求項1ないし14のいずれか一項に記載の無線通信端末。 The first frame and the third frame include the time for which transmission is desired, the data size desired for transmission, the number of streams for transmission, an error correction scheme, a modulation scheme, a coding scheme, or a channel for transmission. The radio | wireless communication terminal as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 14 including the information regarding at least 1 among these. - 前記制御部は、前記第4フレームの送信完了後にOFDMA(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access)または空間多重で送信される前記第5フレームを受信する
請求項1ないし15のいずれか一項に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein the control unit receives the fifth frame transmitted by OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) or spatial multiplexing after the transmission of the fourth frame is completed. Terminal. - アクセスポイントとして動作する
請求項1ないし16のいずれか一項に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to claim 1, wherein the wireless communication terminal operates as an access point. - IEEE802.11規格に従って通信する
請求項1ないし17のいずれか一項に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to any one of claims 1 to 17, wherein communication is performed in accordance with the IEEE 802.11 standard. - 少なくとも1つのアンテナと、
前記アンテナを介して、フレームを送受信する無線通信部と、
前記無線通信部を介して、送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第1フレームを受信し、
前記第1フレームに基づいて、前記第1フレームの受信完了後に前記データ送信の要求の有無を通知する第2フレームを送信する第1動作、または前記第1フレームの受信後に前記第2フレームの送信を要求する第3フレームの受信に応じて前記第2フレームを送信する第2動作を選択し、選択した動作を実行する、制御部
を備えた無線通信端末。 At least one antenna;
A wireless communication unit for transmitting and receiving a frame via the antenna;
Via the wireless communication unit, receiving a first frame inquiring whether there is a transmission request;
Based on the first frame, a first operation of transmitting a second frame for notifying the presence or absence of the request for data transmission after completion of reception of the first frame, or transmission of the second frame after reception of the first frame A wireless communication terminal comprising: a control unit that selects a second operation for transmitting the second frame in response to reception of the third frame requesting the second frame and executes the selected operation. - 前記第1フレームには、複数の端末の識別子が順番に配置され、
前記制御部は、自装置の識別子が、前記順番に配置された前記識別子のうち所定位置に配置されているとき、前記第1動作を実行し、前記所定位置と異なる位置に配置されているとき、前記第2動作を実行する
請求項19に記載の無線通信端末。 In the first frame, identifiers of a plurality of terminals are arranged in order,
The control unit executes the first operation when the identifier of the own device is disposed at a predetermined position among the identifiers disposed in the order, and is disposed at a position different from the predetermined position. The wireless communication terminal according to claim 19, wherein the second operation is executed. - 前記制御部は、自装置が属する第1グループに属している端末の識別子を順番に配置したグループ情報を受信し、
前記第1フレームは、第2グループの識別子を含み、
前記制御部は、前記第2グループが前記第1グループに一致し、かつ、前記グループ情報において自装置の識別子が所定位置に配置されているときは、前記第1動作を選択および実行し、前記第2グループが前記第1グループに一致し、前記グループ情報において自装置の識別子が前記所定位置と異なる位置に配置されているときは、前記第2動作を選択および実行する
請求項19に記載の無線通信端末。 The control unit receives group information in which identifiers of terminals belonging to a first group to which the device belongs are arranged in order,
The first frame includes a second group of identifiers;
The control unit selects and executes the first operation when the second group matches the first group and the identifier of the own device is arranged at a predetermined position in the group information, The second operation is selected and executed when the second group matches the first group and the identifier of the device is arranged at a position different from the predetermined position in the group information. Wireless communication terminal. - 前記第1フレームは、第1グループの識別子と、前記第1グループに属する端末のうちの1つの端末の識別子とを含み、
前記制御部は、前記第1グループが、自装置の属する第2グループに一致し、かつ、前記1つの端末の識別子が自装置の識別子に一致するときは、前記第1動作を選択および実行し、前記第1グループが第2グループに一致し、前記1つの端末の識別子が自装置の識別子に一致しないときは、前記第2動作を選択および実行する
請求項19に記載の無線通信端末。 The first frame includes an identifier of a first group and an identifier of one terminal among terminals belonging to the first group;
The control unit selects and executes the first operation when the first group matches the second group to which the own device belongs and the identifier of the one terminal matches the identifier of the own device. The wireless communication terminal according to claim 19, wherein the second operation is selected and executed when the first group matches the second group and the identifier of the one terminal does not match the identifier of the own device. - IEEE802.11規格に従って通信する
請求項19ないし22のいずれか一項に記載の無線通信端末。 The wireless communication terminal according to any one of claims 19 to 22, wherein communication is performed in accordance with the IEEE 802.11 standard. - 無線通信端末による無線通信方法であって、
送信の許可を要求する第1フレームを受信するステップと、
前記第1フレームの受信に応じて、前記第1フレームを送信した第1端末と異なる第2端末に送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第2フレームを送信するステップと、
前記送信の要求の有無を通知する第3フレームを受信するステップと、
前記第1フレームと前記第3フレームに基づいて、前記送信を許可する第3端末を指定した第4フレームを送信するステップと、
前記第4フレームの送信完了後に前記第3端末から送信される第5フレームを受信するステップと
を備えた無線通信方法。 A wireless communication method using a wireless communication terminal,
Receiving a first frame requesting permission to transmit;
In response to receiving the first frame, transmitting a second frame inquiring whether there is a transmission request to a second terminal different from the first terminal that transmitted the first frame;
Receiving a third frame notifying whether there is a request for transmission;
Transmitting a fourth frame designating a third terminal permitted to transmit based on the first frame and the third frame;
Receiving a fifth frame transmitted from the third terminal after completion of transmission of the fourth frame. - 無線通信端末による無線通信方法であって、
送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第1フレームを受信するステップと、
前記第1フレームに基づいて、前記第1フレームの受信完了後に前記送信の要求の有無を通知する第2フレームを送信する第1動作、または前記第1フレームの受信後に前記第2フレームの送信を要求する第3フレームの受信に応じて前記第2フレームを送信する第2動作を選択し、選択した動作を実行するステップと
を備えた無線通信方法。 A wireless communication method using a wireless communication terminal,
Receiving a first frame inquiring whether there is a request for transmission;
Based on the first frame, a first operation of transmitting a second frame for notifying the presence or absence of the transmission request after completion of reception of the first frame, or transmission of the second frame after reception of the first frame Selecting a second operation for transmitting the second frame in response to reception of the requested third frame, and executing the selected operation. - 第1無線通信端末と複数の第2無線通信端末とを備えた無線通信システムであって、
前記第1無線通信端末は、送信の許可を要求する第1フレームを前記第2無線通信端末から受信し、前記第1フレームの受信に応じて、前記第1フレームを送信した前記第2無線通信端末と異なる他の第2無線通信端末に前記送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第2フレームを送信し、前記送信の要求の有無を通知する第3フレームを前記他の第2無線通信端末から受信し、前記第1フレームと前記第3フレームに基づいて、前記送信を許可する前記第2無線通信端末である第3無線通信端末を指定した第4フレームを送信し、前記第4フレームの送信完了後に前記第3無線通信端末から送信される第5フレームを受信する、第1制御部を備え、
前記第2無線通信端末は、前記第2フレームを前記第1無線通信端末から受信し、前記第2フレームに基づいて、前記第2フレームの受信完了後に前記第3フレームを送信する第1動作、または前記第2フレームの受信後に前記第1無線通信端末から受信される、前記第3フレームの送信を要求する第6フレームの受信に応じて、前記第3フレームを送信する第2動作を選択し、選択した動作を実行する、第2制御部を備えた
無線通信システム。 A wireless communication system comprising a first wireless communication terminal and a plurality of second wireless communication terminals,
The first wireless communication terminal receives a first frame requesting permission for transmission from the second wireless communication terminal, and transmits the first frame in response to reception of the first frame. A second frame for inquiring whether there is a request for transmission is transmitted to another second radio communication terminal different from the terminal, and a third frame for notifying whether there is a request for transmission is received from the other second radio communication terminal. A fourth frame designating a third wireless communication terminal which is the second wireless communication terminal permitting the transmission based on the first frame and the third frame is transmitted, and after the transmission of the fourth frame is completed A first control unit for receiving a fifth frame transmitted from the third wireless communication terminal;
A first operation in which the second wireless communication terminal receives the second frame from the first wireless communication terminal, and transmits the third frame based on the second frame after the reception of the second frame is completed; Or selecting a second operation for transmitting the third frame in response to reception of a sixth frame requesting transmission of the third frame received from the first wireless communication terminal after receiving the second frame. A wireless communication system including a second control unit that executes the selected operation. - 第1無線通信端末と複数の第2無線通信端末との無線通信方法であって、
前記第1無線通信端末が、送信の許可を要求する第1フレームを前記第2無線通信端末のうちの1つから受信し、前記第1フレームの受信に応じて、前記第1フレームを送信した前記第2無線通信端末と異なる他の第2無線通信端末に前記送信の要求の有無を問い合わせる第2フレームを送信し、前記送信の要求の有無を通知する第3フレームを前記他の第2無線通信端末から受信し、前記第1フレームと前記第3フレームに基づいて、前記送信を行う前記第2無線通信端末である第3無線通信端末を指定した第4フレームを送信し、前記第4フレームの送信完了後に前記第3無線通信端末から送信される第5フレームを受信し、
前記他の第2無線通信端末が、前記第2フレームを前記第1無線通信端末から受信し、前記第2フレームに基づいて、前記第2フレームの受信完了後に前記第3フレームを送信する第1動作、または前記第2フレームの受信後に前記第1無線通信端末から受信される、前記第3フレームの送信を要求する第6フレームの受信に応じて、前記第3フレームを送信する第2動作を選択し、選択した動作を実行する
無線通信方法。 A wireless communication method between a first wireless communication terminal and a plurality of second wireless communication terminals,
The first wireless communication terminal receives a first frame requesting permission for transmission from one of the second wireless communication terminals, and transmits the first frame in response to reception of the first frame. A second frame that inquires about the presence or absence of the transmission request is transmitted to another second wireless communication terminal that is different from the second wireless communication terminal, and a third frame that notifies the presence or absence of the transmission request is transmitted to the other second wireless communication terminal. A fourth frame that is received from a communication terminal and that designates a third wireless communication terminal that is the second wireless communication terminal that performs the transmission is transmitted based on the first frame and the third frame, and the fourth frame Receiving a fifth frame transmitted from the third wireless communication terminal after transmission of
The other second wireless communication terminal receives the second frame from the first wireless communication terminal, and transmits the third frame based on the second frame after the reception of the second frame is completed. An operation or a second operation of transmitting the third frame in response to reception of a sixth frame requesting transmission of the third frame received from the first wireless communication terminal after receiving the second frame. A wireless communication method for selecting and executing a selected operation.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2014-233895 | 2014-11-18 | ||
JP2014233895A JP2018011093A (en) | 2014-11-18 | 2014-11-18 | Radio communication terminal, memory card, radio communication device, radio communication method and radio communications system |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2016080408A1 true WO2016080408A1 (en) | 2016-05-26 |
Family
ID=56013943
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2015/082307 WO2016080408A1 (en) | 2014-11-18 | 2015-11-17 | Wireless communication terminal, wireless communication method, and wireless communication system |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP2018011093A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2016080408A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN113966598A (en) * | 2019-06-10 | 2022-01-21 | 日本电产株式会社 | Communication device, communication system, communication method, and program |
Families Citing this family (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP3293902B1 (en) | 2015-05-07 | 2023-05-31 | International Semiconductor Group | Wireless communication device |
EP3294032B1 (en) | 2015-05-07 | 2021-03-10 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba, Inc. | Wireless communication terminal and wireless communication method |
JP7082819B2 (en) * | 2019-07-24 | 2022-06-09 | サイレックス・テクノロジー株式会社 | Wireless access points, wireless communication terminals, wireless communication methods, and programs |
US11337222B2 (en) * | 2020-06-24 | 2022-05-17 | Sony Group Corporation | Coordinated stations in a single BSS with shared TXOP in the frequency domain |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2003009220A (en) * | 2001-06-26 | 2003-01-10 | Kyocera Corp | Radio communication system and radio communication terminal |
JP2007129423A (en) * | 2005-11-02 | 2007-05-24 | Kddi Corp | Wireless access control method taking into account permissible delay time, access point, terminal, and program |
JP2010081360A (en) * | 2008-09-26 | 2010-04-08 | Toshiba Corp | Radio communication apparatus and radio communication method |
JP2013503570A (en) * | 2009-08-25 | 2013-01-31 | クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッド | Method and apparatus for multi-user communication within a client-initiated communication transmission scheme |
JP2013511938A (en) * | 2009-11-24 | 2013-04-04 | エレクトロニクス アンド テレコミュニケーションズ リサーチ インスチチュート | Frame transmission method in multi-user based wireless communication system |
WO2014011006A1 (en) * | 2012-07-13 | 2014-01-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for accessing channel using null data packet in wireless lan system |
-
2014
- 2014-11-18 JP JP2014233895A patent/JP2018011093A/en active Pending
-
2015
- 2015-11-17 WO PCT/JP2015/082307 patent/WO2016080408A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2003009220A (en) * | 2001-06-26 | 2003-01-10 | Kyocera Corp | Radio communication system and radio communication terminal |
JP2007129423A (en) * | 2005-11-02 | 2007-05-24 | Kddi Corp | Wireless access control method taking into account permissible delay time, access point, terminal, and program |
JP2010081360A (en) * | 2008-09-26 | 2010-04-08 | Toshiba Corp | Radio communication apparatus and radio communication method |
JP2013503570A (en) * | 2009-08-25 | 2013-01-31 | クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッド | Method and apparatus for multi-user communication within a client-initiated communication transmission scheme |
JP2013511938A (en) * | 2009-11-24 | 2013-04-04 | エレクトロニクス アンド テレコミュニケーションズ リサーチ インスチチュート | Frame transmission method in multi-user based wireless communication system |
WO2014011006A1 (en) * | 2012-07-13 | 2014-01-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for accessing channel using null data packet in wireless lan system |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
TOMOYA TANDAI: "B-5-106 Proposal of a transmission procedure of the uplink multiuser MIMO in IEEE 802.11 WLANs", PROCEEDINGS OF THE 2009 IEICE GENERAL CONFERENCE TSUSHIN 1, 17 March 2009 (2009-03-17), pages 539 * |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN113966598A (en) * | 2019-06-10 | 2022-01-21 | 日本电产株式会社 | Communication device, communication system, communication method, and program |
CN113966598B (en) * | 2019-06-10 | 2023-12-29 | 日本电产株式会社 | Communication device, communication system, communication method, and computer-readable recording medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2018011093A (en) | 2018-01-18 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6966520B2 (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
JP6408605B2 (en) | Wireless communication device | |
JP6482652B2 (en) | Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method | |
JP6640670B2 (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
JP6482653B2 (en) | Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method | |
JP6495984B2 (en) | Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method | |
JP6335205B2 (en) | Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method | |
JP6621870B2 (en) | Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method | |
WO2016152686A1 (en) | Integrated circuit for wireless communication | |
WO2016152683A1 (en) | Wireless communication integrated circuit and wireless communication method | |
JP6874074B2 (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
JP7002507B2 (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
WO2016080408A1 (en) | Wireless communication terminal, wireless communication method, and wireless communication system | |
JP6652468B2 (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
JP2017059911A (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
JP2017055314A (en) | Radio communication system and radio communication method | |
JP7130090B2 (en) | Wireless communication device and wireless communication method | |
JP2016213568A (en) | Integrated circuit for wireless communication | |
JP2019057756A (en) | Radio communication apparatus and radio communication method | |
WO2016080410A1 (en) | Integrated circuit for wireless communication | |
JP2017055312A (en) | Wireless communication terminal and wireless communication method | |
JP2017055311A (en) | Integrated circuit for wireless communication | |
JP2017092686A (en) | Integrated circuit for radio communication, radio communication terminal and radio communication method | |
JP2017055313A (en) | Wireless communication terminal and wireless communication method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 15860428 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 15860428 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |